Home

LOOP-AM MODEL 3440 Wideband Access DCS-MUX

1. Port Led T 1 31 1 d 3 1 17 d 3 17 Teos EOL 2d ow 18 d 3 18 3d S 19 d ux d 4 d 3 4 20 d 3 20 T S 4 01 5d 2 5 21d 3 21 Clear No 6 d 3 6 22 d 31 22 d v od yrs 3007 23 d 3 23 8 d COE 24 d 3 24 9 d 2 09 25 d 3 29 Source 10 d 3 10 26 d 3 26 Slot t 1 11 d 3 11 27 d 3 27 Port 2 Pi 12 d 3 12 28 d 3 28 TS c5 BL 138 3 3 230 3 29 14 d 3 14 30 d 3 30 Confirm Yes 15 d 315 31 d 3 431 16 d 3 16 lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt 174 Chapter 11 Appendix E Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring 8 Ring Enabling From the Master Unit AM 3440 A Controller Setup screen press R to set up PDH Ring Protection LOOP AM3440 A Controller Setup 11 49 25 10 09 2009 System SNMP Setup Password TSI Map Setup Select a New TSI Map Copy a TSI Map to Another Clear a TSI Map Command Line Init New Card Clear Empty Slot Link Backup Function QDS1 1 1 Protection DS0 SNCP Setup PDH Ring Protection PDH Ring Diagnostic SNTP Setup TELNET SSH Setup Power Setup UOGi Zi od UG ANO QC H E nj bl UO Q U 0 y Eod dod m Jb G Ob Gd cb dp dn dw T OE Oe Ob d VV VV VV VV VV VVVVNNNN enter a command Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or The PDH Ring Protection screen will appear LOOP AM3440 A PDH Ring Protection 18 10 53 02 16 2012 ARROW KEYS Cursor move
2. ae Alarm Type Unit Alarm Type Alarm Description Number Alarm cut off 0 Slot no work 1 Slot start 2 Clock loss 3 Primary start 4 Redundant loss 5 Backup switch 6 Power failure 7 Redundant checksum error 8 Controller Fan failure 9 TSI map switch 10 LINK PROTECTION ALARM 11 REDUNDANT INSERT ALARM 12 REDUNDANT UNSYNC ALARM 13 REDUNDANT TO PRIMARY ALARM 14 PLUG IN 15 CARD TYPE MISMATCH ALARM LINK ID MISMATCH ALARM 16 POWER CONSUMPTION ALARM 17 SSM CLOCK SWITCH ALARM 18 RAI Remote Alarm Indication 21 AIS Alarm Indication Signal 22 LOS Loss of Signal 23 E1 card LOF Loss of Frame 24 BPV Bipolar Violation 25 ES Error Second 26 UAS Unavailable Second 27 CSS Control Slip Second 28 YEL Yellow Alarm 21 AIS Alarm Indication Signal 22 LOS Loss of Signal 23 T1 card LOF Loss of Frame 24 BPV Bipolar Violation 25 ES Error Second 26 UAS Unavailable Second 27 CSS Control Slip Second 28 Note If Redundant Loss and Redundant Insert are a pair the alarm condition will be cleared when Redundant Insert occurs after Redundant Loss If Slot no work and Slot start are a pair the alarm condition will be cleared when Slot start occurs after Slot no work 36 Chapter 3 Operation quc Alarm Type Unit Alarm Type Alarm Description damba DTE cards V 35 V 36 UNSYNC Un synchronous 20 X 21 V 11 EIA530 RAI or YEL Remote Alarm Indicat
3. 65 72 gt 73 80 gt 81 88 gt 89 96 gt lt lt TAB key to show Statistics Report gt gt lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt Press TAB key to display the 1 hour statistics report as below shows SLOT C MQuad El PORT 1 Port 24 Hour Stat Report 13 42 16 10 27 2004 USER ES Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 282 seconds Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval O0 SES SUAS SBES SSES DM CSS Current 15 Min 0 7092 0 0000 0 7092 0 0000 6 6666 0 0000 Current 24 Hour A AS E LM EM C Ce USER SES Last 96 15 Min Interval QU OBD tados Goines RON SS SDS AS A veru Hes Q9 A US 17 24 gt 25 32 gt N A ASNO AAA AA 33240 derives AA A ES SS AA AS ASA 41 48 gt RADO s soiree e e eese A os nies AR SS AS tS esa Sep seas Se 57 64 gt c 2 2 2 Dono 22 2222 2 2 6 59 12 15 SS SN E CS CRS suede A A Sa A sie oia 32x90 SPSS eot apetece d o a ant 81 88 gt a o GSE o a a Emm COR 96 SIA A SS AS A A A IA lt lt TAB key to show Performance Report gt gt
4. Slot Plug in cards and Fan Tray 125 Vdc 100W Note Power Module Power Consumption Watt CTRL Single controller 4 1 channel E1 Single E1 interface 2 1 channel T1 Single T1 interface 2 Mini Quad E1 Four E1 interfaces 2 1 channel E1 ATM Frame Relay 3 1 channel T1 ATM Frame Relay 3 Mini 2 LAN port 32 WAN port Router 2 Slot 2 LAN port 64 WAN port Router A 3 Fiber optical interface 2 3 channel Terminal Server 2 1 channel EIA530 2 1 channel RS232 1 1 channel V 35 1 1 channel X 21 2 4 channel E1 3 4 channel T1 3 6 channel U interface 2 10 channel U interface 3 8 channel OCU DP 12 2 channel G SHDSL 2 pairs w o line 5 power 4 channel G SHDSL 1 pair w o line 5 power 8 channel G 703 card at 64 Kbps data 2 rate 8 channel Dry Contact I O 3 8 channel 2W AW E amp M 7 Single 12 channel FXS 19 12 channel OFF Hook 19 W Slot 6 channel OFF Hook 12 W 4 channel OFF Hook 10 W 12 channel FXO 4 12 channel Magneto 8 1 channel low speed optical C37 94 1 4 channel low speed optical C37 94 2 8 channel RS232 with X 50 subrate 1 8 LAN port 64 WAN port Router B 6 3 channel E1 3 Conference Card 4 TDMoE 5 7 Data Bridge Card 1 6 channel X 21 V 11 4 6 channel V 35 4 6 channel V 36 6 6 channel EIA530 RS449 card 6 Dual 24 channel FXS 38 Slot 24 channel FXO 8 2 channel G SHDSL 2 pairs with line 25 Fan tray required power Fan tray required 4 channel G SHDSL 1 pair with line 33 Fan tray required powe
5. Port 1d 9 1 17d 9 17 ld A 1 7d A 17 ToS on 2da 9 2 18d 9 18 2d A 2 8d A 18 3d 9 3 19d 9 19 3d A 3 9d A 19 4d 9 4 20d 9 20 4d A 4 20d A 20 T S 5 d 9 5 21d 9 21 5d A 5 21d A 21 Clear 6d 9 6 22 d 9 22 6d A 6 22 d A 22 d v 7d 9 7 23 d 9 23 7d A 7 23 d A 23 8d 9 8 24d 9 24 8d A 8 24 d A 24 9d 9 9 25d 9 25 9d A 9 25 d A 25 Source 10 d 9 10 26 d 9 26 10d A 10 26d A 26 Slot 9 11d 9 11 27d 9 27 11d A 11 27d A 27 Port 12d 9 12 28 d 9 28 12d A 12 28 d A 28 T S Bl 13d 9 13 29 d 9 29 13d A 13 29 d A 29 14 d 9 14 30d 9 30 14d A 14 30d A 30 Confirm Yes 15d 9 15 31d 9 31 15d A 15 31d A 31 16 d 9 16 16d A 16 lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt NOTE For voice cards users do not have to select the time slot T S data The system will automatically adjust the T S number according to the port number you set up T S 01 is for port1 T S 02 is for port 2 and T S 10 is for port 10 The T S time slot number will always correspond to the port number After complete the TSI Map Setup press ESC key then the following screen shows up LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 18 12 42 08 01 2011 Please use D command next screen to activate map as current map and V command main menu to save maps to Flash memory gt gt Press any key to continue After you change the TSI Map you need to go to Select a New TSI Map to activate the new map 68
6. Jumper Circuit Protection 7 OFF 8 OFF 9 OFF 10 OFF 2 3 7 Line Power Option The line power option only available on G SHDSL cards which takes 2 DTE slots per card It is factory installed option available with 48 Vdc 125Vdc powered chassis only Also Fan tray is required 2 4 Configuration Setting 2 4 1 Software Configuration Setting There are four system configurations Factory default Current working User stored Link backup The factory default configurations are not changeable Each Loop AM is shipped with all three configurations set to the factory default configuration The current working configuration which can be saved into nonvolatile memory as a user stored configuration can be changed at any time When the system is reset the previous configuration will be retrieved as the current working configuration The user stored configuration can be retrieved at any time User can retrieve the user stored configuration to overwrite the current working configuration Please refer to the section of Store Retrieve Configuration for the detail operation The link backup configuration are the 1 1 and 1 1 protection schemes which only available in single E1 T1 FOM mini slot and 1FOMA single slot cards This occurs when the system is set up so that a backup line or lines in the case of 1 n will be switched into service if the working line fails Please refer to the section of Link Backup Function f
7. Slot 9 10 QuadE1 QuadE1 CIRCUIT LINE NONREV 1 1 NONREV DISABLE Slot 11 12 Protection Working Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Slot A B FE1 FE1 Slot C D FOM Slot 1 2 QuadE1 Slot 3 4 Slot 5 6 Slot 7 8 Slot 9 10 QuadE1 QuadE1 9 9 52 9 3 Slot 11 12 If protection type changed ex from 1 1 to 1 1 Please re setup map gt gt Change configuration Y N Note to save please use V command Note Protection Working Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Slot 9 10 QuadE1 QuadE1 9 1 9 22 9 m3 Definition 9 1 means Slot 9 port 1 9 2 means Slot 9 port 2 and etc 156 Chapter 9 Appendix C QDS1 1 1 Protection Force Switch Configuration The protection Setup must be set before the status setup Go to Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt Q QDS1 1 1 Protection select Status and press Enter The Status menu is to setup the ForceSwitch for each protection pair and ports LOOP AM3440 A QDS1 1 1 Protection 15 19 15 08 02 2011 gt gt Select Setup Status The Status menu it is to setup the force switch function to the assigned port of assigned protect pair LOOP AM3440 A QDS1 1 1 Protection 17 00 00 08 02 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Protect Pair Master Backup Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Slot A B FEl FEl 22222222222 22
8. LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Information 16 19 38 10 15 2010 DSO SNCP ENABLE Total DSO SNCP 2 Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS 1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Non revertible 2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non revertible The working timeslot will then switch from the original one to the other In the sample screen the original working timeslot for index 1 circuit is Primary Once it has been force switched the working timeslot will switch to Secondary The working timeslot is indicated by the W mark beside the slot number LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Information 16 19 38 10 15 2010 DSO SNCP ENABLE Total DSO SNCP 2 Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS 1 D 01 7 1 01 W8 1 01 D Non revertible 2 G 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non revertible 196 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup To force switch the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether key in the first index number in the from column and the last index number in the to column Change Mode Change the DS0 SNCP mode between revertible and non revertible Press M on the screen of DSO SNCP information A prompt message will ask you which SNCP circuit you would like to switch the mode Key in the circuit s index number and press Enter Then select Yes for Confirm to do LOOP AM3440 A DS
9. LOOP AM3440 A System Setup SYSTEM 09 39 08 08 18 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS System Time Date 09 39 08 08 18 2010 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A Network NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer LAN ON 010 003 023 010 255 255 000 000 Ethernet WAN OFF 020 001 001 002 255 255 000 000 HDLC 00000001 Gateway Interface LAN Gateway IPAddr 000 000 000 000 nband Uses Slot D Note Slot D port 4 can t use unframe mode CONSOLE port Baud Rate 38400 Data Length Be Bits Stop Bit 1 B3ut Parity NONE XON XOFF XOFF TSI map Clock TSI Function 1 1 Bidirection Clock Mode Normal dle Signalling 1010 gt gt Change configuration Y N Note to save please use V command 95 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Under the Controller Menu press K to do clock source setup Then the following screen will show up ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE LOOP AM3440 A System Setup CLOCK Normal Mode 14 14 07 09 09 2008 TAB ROLL OPTIONS Master Clk Source SLOT 6 P1 Clock Hold Over ON Second Clk Source INTERNAL Current Clock MASTER CLK Clk Recover Mode AUTOMATIC Clock Status NORMAL Ext Clock Type El 750hm Dual External Clock Protection Disable lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Configuration option Configuration Option Default Master Clk Source INTERNAL EXTERNAL Line Interface INTERNAL Second Clk
10. Slot 9 10 QuadE1 QuadE1 CIRCUIT LINE NONREV 1 1 NONREV DISABLE Slot 11 12 0 222 222 2222 22222222222 Protection Working Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Slot A B FE1 FE1 slot C D FOM Slot 1 2 QuadE1 Slot 3 4 Slot 5 6 Slot 7 8 Slot 9 10 QuadE1 QuadE1 9 1 9 2 9 3 Slot 11 12 Change configuration Y N Note to save please use V command Force Switch Configuration The protection Setup must be set before the status setup Go to Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt Q QDS1 1 1 Protection select Status and press Enter The Status menu is to setup the ForceSwitch for each protection pair and ports LOOP AM3440 A QDS1 1 1 Protection 15 19 15 08 02 2011 gt gt Select Setup Status 158 Chapter 9 Appendix C QDS1 1 1 Protection The Status menu it is to setup the force switch function to the assigned port of assigned protect pair LOOP AM3440 A QDS1 1 1 Protection 17 00 00 08 02 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Protect Pair Master Backup Port 1 Port 2 Slot A B FE1 FEL 0 nooo Slot C D FOM Slot 1 2 QuadE1 2 22222222222 Slot 3 4 Slot 5 6 is Slot 7 8 Slot 9 10 QuadE1 QuadE1
11. Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS 1 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Lock 2 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Non revertible ESC return SPACE next page D delete F force switch M change mode lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt On Device B lock the primary data path with the protected E1 card at slot C LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Information 14 51 28 11 19 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS DSO SNCP ENABLE Total DSO SNCP 1 Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS 1 C 01 W 2 2 01 1 2 01 D Lock ESC return SPACE next page D delete F force switch M change mode lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Second access the 3E1 port menu of Device B Choose L Unit Loopback Setup from the 3E1 port menu Select LOCAL local loopback for Near end Loopback and press ENTER SLOT 2 3 El PORT 1 Port Loopback Test 15 45 49 11 19 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE ENTER KEY ITEM SELECT T 202 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup SEND LOOPBACK ACTIVATE CODE TO FAR END PAYLOAD INE SEND LOOPBACK DEACTIVATE CODE TO FAR END PAYLOAD INE SEND TEST PATTERN OFF PRBS FULL STATUS
12. AM3440 A amp 1 UNIT Management Wi W2 We Router LAN f One TS AM3440 C E AM3440 A 2 i E ai RA Er ER Us Management Hore Router ii E1 One TS OneTS rp Sepp 3 lle TT s E un EHE nnn SULTS nnt AM3440 A 3 AM3440 A 4 Figure 8 1 Inband Management Diagram 149 Chapter 8 Appendix B Inband Management 8 2 Inband Management Setup Procedure To configure the Inband Management in the follow procedure 1 Selectthe inband slot in Controller Menu S System Setup 2 Set Trap IP Address and its community in Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt S SNMP Setup gt B V1 Trap Setup 3 Set TSI Map in Controller Menu S System Setup C TSI Map Setup Configure Inband Slot Use arrow keys to move the cursor and then set up the parameters in Network section Then choose slot D port 4 or slot 12 port 4 for inband management When done press ESC to return to the Controller Setup Menu LOOP AM3440 A System Setup SYSTEM 19 02 31 08 03 2011 System Time Date 19 02 32 08 03 2011 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A Network NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer LAN OFF 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 Ethernet WAN OFF 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 HDLC 00000001 Gateway Interface LAN Gateway IPAddr 000 000 000 000 CONSOLE port Baud Rate 9600 Data Length z B Bits
13. Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 4 10 4 Map slot D ATM FR to HDLC Inband Channel LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 10 08 40 09 13 2002 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target ATM FR Source HDLC Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Slot D ii aa A Port 1 d B Ate od d dl D 153 TS ete 2 d B 2 18 d s ud B 3 19 d 4 d B 4 20 d LS E OL 5d A 21 d Clear No 6 d A 2 22 d d v d 7 d A 3 23 d 8 d A 4 24 d 9 d 1 1 25 d Source LO va 1 1 2 26 d Slot e HD Ii d 1 1 3 27 d Port 12 d 1 1 4 28 d TS 01 13 d HD 29 d 14 d 30 d Confirm Yes 15 d 31 d 16 d lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt 6 4 11 System Setup 6 4 11 1 ATM FR card Configuration From the main system menu press U to select the PORT in this case PORT D Then from the PORT menu press S for Unit System Setup The following screen is shown Atthe bottom four setup choices are given For initial setup each of these four setup screens should be filled in An asterisk will highlight the current selection Use arrow keys to change selection Press ENTER to activate SLOT D ATM FR El Port System Setup 17 35 29 03 23 2002 gt gt Select ATM setup Type T1 E1 CH MAP FR MAN CONN TAB When the setup choice T1 E1 is entered The following screen is shown The Interface setti
14. lt lt TAB key to show Performance Report gt gt lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 137 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 5 2 Unit 24 Hour Performance Report Press 2 from Port Menu to view the 24 hour performance report Use TAB key to select register type USER or LINE press ENTER Then move the cursor to select the desired parameter The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port 24 Hour Perf Report 10 28 12 10 27 2004 gt gt Select Register Type USER LINE gt gt Select Parameter ES UAS BES SES CSS DM AS EFS BPV After pressing ENTER from the above screen the following screen will show up SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port 24 Hour Perf Report 10 28 12 10 27 2004 USER ES Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 869 seconds Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval 20 ES UAS BES SES DM CSS Current 15 Min Interval 0 869 0 0 0 146 Current 24 Hour Interval REO 18000 0 0 0 255 USER ES Last 96 15 Min Interval 01 08 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 09 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 24 gt 0 0 0 0 25 32 gt 33 40 gt 41 48 gt 49 56 gt 57 64 gt
15. lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Third go back to Device A and activate Bit Error Test Follow the command path Main Menu T Bit Error Test to access BERT test The function of each configuration is listed below LOOP AM3440 A BERT Test 15 41 19 11 08 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Test Slot O FEL Test Port ee O Pattern Type 2exp20 1 Split Mode Send AIS Test Channel Mapped Test Map 2 ED Ha a Bs jo E es EE E A ade Test Direct To MAP User Pattern 01011101 Period sec 0000000 Test Enable DISABLE lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Test Slot Test Port Select the protected slot and port for BERT diagnosis Our example is to use the E1 card of Device A as the interface that sends outgoing BERT pattern Therefore the test slot should be the location of the E1 card slot C Then choose port one as the test port for the E1 card Pattern Type The transmitted bit sequence that determines the BERT pattern The options include 2exp9 1 2exp11 1 2exp15 1 and user def user define When set as user def you ll have to set the User Pattern according to your need Split Mode Choose to send BERT with or without AIS Alarm Indication Signal 203 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup Test Channel Choose the timeslot that you want to use for BERT diagnosis Mapped means all the mapped ti
16. LOOP AM3440 A SNMP Setup USM 11 14 50 12 08 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE BACKSPACE to edit ESC to abort My Engine D Engine ID 00000337000000007F000001 Boots 2 UB Total User 6 User 01 z 3 Engine ID 00000337000000007F000001 User Name loopmd5 Auth Protocol MD5 Auth Password 100p5678 Priv Protocol DES Priv Password Status Active Storage NonVolatile Skip password will not change current key lt lt ESC key ignore and return ENTER key accept change gt gt V3 View Based Access Control Model Setup 1 Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt S SNMP Setup gt D V3 View Based Access Control Model Setup 1 Press D to setup context and group the user should be in a group The default group name is initial and security name is name of user LOOP AM3440 A SNMP Setup VACM 11 09 22 12 08 2006 Context empty Security to Group 1 7 Security Model V3 USM Security Name loopmd5 Group Name initial Status Active Storage NonVolatile lt lt ESC gt return to menu UP DOWN gt context group LEFT RIGHT gt prev next gt gt lt lt F gt find ENTER gt edit A gt add D gt delete gt gt 66 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation V3 View Based Access Control Model Setup 2 Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt S SNMP Setup gt E V3 View Based Access Control Model Setup 2 Press E to edit Access and Vi
17. 133 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 4 13 Clear Performance Data Under the port menu press K to clear performance data SLOT D ATM FR El Port Statistics gt gt Clear Statistics Type T1 El Line FR Statistics 15 44 43 07 24 2002 ATM Statistics 6 4 14 Upgrade Firmware Under the port menu press D to download firmware SLOT D ATM FR El Download Firmware ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE BACKSPACE to edit ESC to abort Bank 1 Firmware Ver V2 04 07 10 2002 Good Bank 2 Firmware Ver V2 04 06 07 2002 Good Working Firmware Bank 1 TFTP Server IP 1 4 0 50322 05 156 Firmware File Name o LR Soi E Un 17 27 03 07 21 2002 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 134 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 4 15 Unit Load Default Configuration Under the port menu press Y to download firmware Then press Y or N to confirm the selection SLOT D ATM FR El Download Firmware 17 27 03 07 21 2002 gt gt Return to default are you sure Y N Note When you load the default configuration the current daughter card map will not be cleared 6 4 16 Unit Reset Press Z from Port Menu to reset the unit Then press Y or N to confirm the selection SLOT D ATM FR El Download Firmware 17 27 03 07 21 2002 Reset are you sure Y N 135 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 5 Mini Quad E1 Sub Menu Unde
18. 2 trier dei 139 6 5 4 Unit Configuration trien nent ede ee reb e ehe e e dudes e e te 139 6 5 5 Unit Status ici do ae tede ae alsa ee ns a teda nee de ce es 140 6 5 6 Unit Alar History cc e th de e rie ed ted edet ee e ie e os 140 6 5 7 BIO PAROI CIE 141 6 5 8 Unit Loopback Setup ec eoe ree ee rh eite Saad O ALR eee eed eee a 141 6 5 9 Unit System Setup tenete dai cad 142 6 5 10 Unit Clear Performance Data ope ua teda eae iad decet ae aei ia ERR ERAT 142 6 5 11 Unit Alarm Setup ert he atte atit ei longa edu tana Poda Hn deg habeas as 143 6 5 12 Unit Clear Alarm Queue amp History aeiaai eee enm 143 6 5 13 Unit Upgrade Firmware nce ii 144 6 5 14 Unit Load Default Configuration essssssseeene nennen nennen nnns 144 6 5 15 Unit Reset ocioteca 145 T Appendix A Link Backup FUNCION iioii slacks dir riada est bod 146 7 1 mirer ei ito a EET 146 7 2 Physical Requlremierit 2 i accetto ese brace d ect bee ab ear ei heec abate er eate 147 7 3 Setup Procedure ee e eet e eb ee ite a d ee ede M Ada en ee 147 8 Appendix B Inband Management ssssssssssssssseseeeeeneeenenrene nennen ner nrrn sinn en nennrrtr enn nnne 149 8 1 INTO 8 eiifo eS 149 8 2 Inband Management Setup Procedure erre eene nennen enne 150 9 Appendix QD9O91 1 1 Protection nine nU eit ben qd te ec ATE lada 154 9 1 INTKOGUICUION P EI M e SL 154 9 2 Setting up Circuit Protectio
19. EH NE a Ya at EP wAVAVAVAN LOOP AM MODEL 3440 Wideband Access DCS MUX USER S MANUAL LOOP TELECOMMUNICATION INTERNATIONAL INC 8F NO 8 HSIN ANN RD SCIENCE BASED INDUSTRIAL PARK HSINCHU TAIWAN Tel 886 3 578 7696 Fax 886 3 578 7695 O 2012 Loop Telecommunication International Inc All rights reserved Version 84 2 MAR 2012 CAUTION Only qualified service personnel shall install and maintain the system This equipment must be connected to an earth socket outlet which has a permanent connection to protective earth with a cross sectional area of not less than 2 5 mm Ensure protective earthing connected before install uninstall telephone wires Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Pr cautions Seul le personnel qualifi peut installer et entretenir le mat riel L quipement doit tre connect la prise de terre qui doit avoir une connexion permanente la terre de protection avec une section de fil sup rieure 2 5 mm2 S assurer que la terre de protection est branch lors de l installation ou d sinstallation des fils t l phoniques Ne jamais installer les fils du t l phone
20. e Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface e Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines 2 1 Site Selection The following list indicates a site selection guideline User need to follow this guideline to select a proper installation site e Location of the Rack should be part of the central office equipment layout design Considerations should be given to entrance cable routing and 48 Vdc 100W 48 Vdc 150W 125 Vdc 100W or 24 Vdc 150W power e Theinstallation site should have 48 Vdc power An optional AC DC power converter can be used Use only with Class 2 power source 48 Vdc 100 watts 2 2 Mechanical Installation AM3440 can be installed as a desk top unit or mounted on a 19 inch or a 23 inch rack Mounting of the unit in a rack follows standard telephone rack mount practices Accessories to install on a 19 inch or 23 inch rack is provided As a desk top unit AM3440 is stackable 2 3 Electrical Installation Central office 48 Vdc power is wired to terminal blocks in the front of the AM3440 shown in Figure 2 1 Central office alarm system is wired to the Alarm Relay terminal blocks For connection to the CONSOLE button down button up connector for maintenance and administration a CONSOLE port with DB9 connector is located on the front panel see also Figure 2 1 The RJ45 connector is for an Ethernet connection For d
21. Q gt Unit Alarm Queue LOG MISC U gt Choose Other Slot Y gt Unit Load Default Config P gt Choose Port Z gt Unit Reset F gt Log Off SETUP MISC Menu O gt Log On SETUP MISC Menu E gt Return to Controller Main Menu gt gt SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command gt 136 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 5 1 Unit 1 Hour Performance Report Press 1 from Port Menu to view the 1 hour performance report Use TAB key to select register type USER or LINE The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port Menu 10 28 12 10 27 2004 gt gt Select Register Type USER LINE After pressing ENTER from the above screen the following screen will show up SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port 1 Hour Perf Report 10 22 19 10 27 2004 LINE Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 754 seconds ES UAS BES SES DM CSS Current 15 Min Interval 4 0 4 0 T 1 ist Nearest 15 Min interval sree Danse MAPAS DAA AAA AAA 2nd Nearest 15 Min Interval Hi gt sesso Sess PERSA Sa y Sse 3rd Nearest 15 Min Interval 4th Nearest 15 Min Interval 5 Sees Ses SS See SSS oR RETO Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval O0 ES UAS BES SES DM CSS Current 24 Hour Interval Ey PERES AAA BAS AA M m 0 26 2004 yor Maa a CA ss sn 0 25 2004 E A po A AA AS ar
22. 25225 22 25 22 Port 1d IB 1 17 d ld A 1 TS 01 2 A 18 d 3 d 19 d 4 d zd T S 01 ad 21 a Clear No 6 d 22 d d v d 7 d 2 31 3d 8 d 24 d 9 d 25 d Source 10 d 26 d Slot 2 LB ll cd 27 d Port o 12 d 28 d TAS SAME 13 d 29 d 14 d 30 d Confirm Yes L5 SL 16 d lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt 151 Chapter 8 Appendix B Inband Management Use arrow keys to move the cursor and then set up the parameters in Network section Then choose slot D port 4 or slot 12 port 4 for inband management When done press ESC to return to the Controller Setup Menu Note To setup inband management one 64K timeslot must be assigned for link to the controller CTRL through the internal cross connect XC In band timeslot 64Kbps must be selected in either Slot D Port4 or Slot 12 Port4 Below are the plug in cards that will be influenced due to the In band timeslot limitation selected in either Slot Plug in Card D or Slot 12 Slot D FOM MQE1 RTA Slot 12 RTB 4GH TDMoE QE1 QT1 Although the framing option for each of the 4 ports of a Mini Quad E1 Quad E1 T1 or a FOM interface card can be configured either unframed or framed provision for inband management imposes the following limitation When one of these is selected for inband management the Port 4 in that Slot D or 12 must be configured to framed The RTA RTB 4GH and TDMoE card supports up to 32 tim
23. 3 Alarm Trap Type Vendor Spec lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 1 Key in the trap IP address and its community name The default setting for community name is public 2 The trap system IP is the trap s source IP address Select LAN or WAN for trap system IP and the selection will determine the direction that sends the alarm trap Note that the selection should be the same with the network interface NI that shows ON on the System Setup System screen If LAN is ON and WAN is OFF choose LAN for system trap IP If WAN is ON and LAN is OFF choose WAN for trap IP On the sample screen below both LAN and WAN are turned on In this case select either LAN or WAN for trap system IP according to your need LOOP AM3440 A System Setup SYSTEM 18 30 22 08 03 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE Please Input hh mm ss mm dd yyyy BACKSPACE to edit System Time Date 18 30 23 08 03 2011 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A Network NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer 010 003 023 010 255 255 000 000 Ethernet 020 001 001 002 255 255 000 000 HDLC 00000001 Gateway Interface LAN Gateway IPAddr 000 000 000 000 Inband Uses Slot 12 Note Slot 12 port 4 can t use unframe mode 3 Select the Alarm Trap Type to decide the format of alarm type displayed in SNMP menu The alarm type tables for Vendor Spec and Assi
24. 5e MW st ais 3 oed uere E nd sierras Port Pl CAS Protection Delay 00 TiSies OL Upstream Send AIS On Secondary Slot 8 3E1 A IN ato E de Port P1 CAS Protection Delay 00 ToS Upstream Send AIS On Switch Mode Non revertible Data Voice Voice Confirm Yes lt lt ESC key ignore and return ENTER key accept change gt gt 188 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup If you create another DSO SNCP circuit on timeslot 02 and press Yes to confirm the screen will show as below LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Creation 10 36 02 11 26 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Protection Group Creation Using map 1 Total DSO SNCP 2 Protected Slot 9 FXS LBBRZGZLA4CLvstkwReAskRe A Port P2 TA4S9 202 Count 01 Primary Slots Y 3E1 EAN sea eia DD Port Pl CAS Protection Delay 00 T9502 Upstream Send AIS On Secondary Slot 8 3E1 LoS is sesh so 58 44523333 P6 e Port P1 CAS Protection Delay 00 TS 02 Upstream Send AIS On Switch Mode Non revertible Data Voice Voice Confirm Yes lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 189 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup Second build a bypass connection for the intermediate unit Device C Follow the command Main Menu gt S System Setup gt C TSI Map Setup Access the TSI Map setup select the desired slot and port number for the mapping target Next select the starting timeslot number T S and the timeslot amount T S and
25. A Zica deu 3 54 2 30 3 Zi d 2 21 Clear No 6 d 3 6 d 22 d 22 3 6 4 c 6 3 22 d 2 22 d v tod td 3 12d 3 23 s 14 2 TT 32304 4 23 8 d 3 8 124d 3 24 gt Bd 2 8 324 d 2 24 9 d So 9 3 44 Ao 8 Source 10 d 3 10 3 10d 2 10 Slot z Eh Id d 3 11 3 11d 2 11 Port P3 12 d 3 12 3 12d 2 12 qus popu 13 dons dox a PN 14 d 3 14 3 14 d 2 14 Confirm Yes 15 d 3 5 3 15 d 2 15 16 d 3 16 3 16 d 2 16 lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit The source port is Slot 1 Port 1 and the target port is Slot 1 Port 2 LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 15 20 40 03 24 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target Quad T1 NON CAS Source Quad T1 NON CAS Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Slot l Port P2 2 d d T 2 LIA 1 17 1d 3e d oom 17d 3 17 ToS EL 2 2 d 2 18d 1 18 2d 3 2 1184 3 18 2 d Ea L9 Lie 3d 2 X 119 2 Lo 2 4d 4 220d 1 20 4d S E 20d 3 20 T S 23 2 mod Bo IL d Lezo 5 a s 5 2ra 3 2d Clear No 2 6d 6 2 22d L 22 6 d 3 6 WLozod 3 22 d v di 2 Tod T 2230 bh 23 qd 3 T 29 8 3 23 2 8d 8 2 24d B T 8 d 3 8 124 d 3 24 2 9d 9 9 d gt 8 Source 2 10d 10 10 d 32 40 Slot x 1 211d 11 11 d 3 11 Port P1 2 12 d 12 12 d 3 12 Wu cp 2 136 13 138 3013 2 14 d 14 14 d 3 14 Confirm Y
26. LB Timer Loopback Timer 60 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation The system application for WAN and LAN communication is as below AM3440 AM3440 Note IB Inband 1 Use VT100 terminal to enable LAN network Ethernet Port This way you can manage a specific AM3400 unit If you would like to make a series of AM3400 units to communicate though WAN network proceed to step 2 2 Once you start managing an AM3440 unit go to System Setup MAP in VT100 and set up inband management Also choose a desired plug in card E1 or FOM for WAN network communication Then enable the WAN network and key in the IP address in System Setup Follow the same procedure to set up the units you wish to manage though WAN network 3 AM3440 units will start communicating through E1 or FOM card under WAN network 61 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 7 2 SNMP Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt S SNMP Setup The SNMP setup has 6 sub menus LOOP AM3440 A SNMP Setup 10 54 58 12 08 2006 A gt SNMP System Setup B gt Vl Trap Setup C gt V3 User Based Security Model Setup D gt V3 View Based Access Control Model Setup 1 E gt V3 View Based Access Control Model Setup 2 F V3 Target amp Notify Setup lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt SNMP System Setup Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt S SNMP Setup gt A SNMP System Se
27. M gt System Alarm Setup W gt Firmware Transfer A gt Download Mainboard Firmware C Download Configuration D gt Upload Configuration __ E gt Download Mainboard Boot up ___ R gt Copy Firmware to Redundant V gt Store Retrieve Configuration K gt Clock source Setup T gt Bit Error Rate Test A gt System B gt Clock Source C gt TSI map D gt Current TSI map E gt Power Fan Status C System Configuration DISPLAY G gt Link Backup Function Q gt QDS1 1 1 Protection K gt DSO SNCP Status R gt PDH Ring Protection Status B gt Clock source Configuration Q gt Alarm Queue Summary H gt Information Summary H R gt Redundant CTRL Information P gt Performance Report A gt DSO SNCP Performance Figure 6 1 AM3440 Controller Menu Tree Note PDH Ring Protection and PDH Ring Diagnostic are optional functions To access theses two optional functions you must order the PDH Ring software separately or these two functions will not show on the VT100 menu 47 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 Main Menu If the terminal screen is illegible press the Enter and Esc key alternatively to bring up the main menu This is particularly needed if the terminal is connected to the controller while the power is already applied If the main menu still fails to appear check to see that the terminal is configured as
28. Note For firmware download procedure Warm Restart is recommended 90 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 3 After few minutes the device will automatically load the system hardware configuration The initial system configure screen with Loop brand appears se RE is 1 x ore pror pop rt ppt g 04 rrrrr T EGER rr Board Slot 0 Press ACO key to load default configuration 3 2 1 Init System Configuration s Load Previous Warm Restart Redundant board End task ProcHbData evRedToPri happened during initialization Redundant gt Primary takeover Testing and Init DM9000 Ethernet controller OK Init SCC1 HDLC port v3myengine block unable to install engine info Init RS485 SCC4 Trigger all Task Enable RS485 and Ethernet Init Master Clock 4 Press Z Controller Reset to reset the redundant controller card Select Redundant and key in password Loop default password loop Please wait for approximate 3 minutes for next screen to show up LOOP AM3440 A Reset Control Board 14 52 10 02 29 2012 gt gt Select Redundant Primary System gt gt Enter password XXXXX 5 The screen shows the Redundant is synchronizing with Primary Please wait Redundant is synchronizing with Primary don t insert any card during this synchronizing process 91 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 The screen will return to Controller
29. SLOFC Current 15 Min 100 00 100 00 0 00003 0 0000 0 0000 0 00003 0 0000 1st Nearest 15 Min ERRE A AAA RARE dp Rd eae 2nd Nearest 15 Min e aS 3rd Nearest 15 Min EAS AA AAA A A A RN el a JS ga 4th Nearest 15 Min ii G aes Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval 0 SAS SEFS SES SBES SSES SCSS SLOFC lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt 110 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 4 1 2 ATM Frame Relay El To view ATM FR E1 port 1 hour performance report by selecting register type The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk SLOT D ATM FR El Port l Hour Perf Report 16 29 59 07 24 2002 USER Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 16 seconds ES UAS BES SES DM CSS Current 15 Min Interval 0 16 0 0 0 16 list Nearest Llo Min Interval coca eS 022 PS maio eins Sheed 2nd Nearest lo MiniInterval a c8 CEA Ong AAA CSS See Jrd Nearest 15 Miu Interval i Gasan Fases Sessa Desa oasis queen 4th Nearzest T5 cMin Interval uu SS Seas ARA A CREAS AO Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval 0 ES UAS BES SES DM CSS Current 24 Hour Interval og Gosto cce SSeS feque mee Sachs 07 23 2002 0 Ft div Co PRA Gimeno supe A festen A che ONT 22F 2002 1 f t IS sacar ESATO Lee gue QUI2L IZ2002 A SS SSS JESSE ESSE cm 04 20 2002 CE RES AAA AAA AA Eu sexe QT7 139 20025 T Ee SAA O
30. This setting is highlighted on the sample setup screen below SLOT A MQuad El PORT 1 Port System Setup 15 24 25 03 24 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS FRAME ON CODE HDB3 CRC ON RAI ON AIS FRAMED CAS OFF SIGNALLING TRANS CGA NORM OOS BUSY FDL SSM Sa_bit Sa4 IDLE D5 Protected DISABLE Master SLAVE INTF 120 Ohm Warning If you need to change FRAME and CAS Please clear TSI MAP MAP1 4 of this port lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 6 TSI Function The TSI function for all the AM3440 A devices must be set at 1 N Multicast This setting is highlighted on the sample setup screen below LOOP AM3440 A System Setup SYSTEM 09 39 08 08 18 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS System Time Date 09 39 08 08 18 2010 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A Network NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer LAN ON 010 003 023 010 255 255 000 000 Ethernet WAN ON 020 001 001 002 255 255 000 000 HDLC 00000001 Gateway Interface LAN Gateway IPAddr 000 000 000 000 nband Uses Slot D or 12 Note Slot D or 12 port 4 can t use unframe mode CONSOLE port Baud Rate 38400 Data Length 8 Bits Stop Bit l Bit Parity NONE XON XOFF XOFF TSI map Clock TSI Function Clock Mode Normal dle Signalling 1010 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 172 Chapter 11 Appendix E Setting up an AM
31. Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 7 5 Select a New TSI Map Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt D Select a New TSI Map This function is to allow change the active map from previous setting Sample below shows the new setting on Map 1 will replace the previous Map 1 by select MAP_1 on Change to TSI Map ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Change to TSI Map lt lt Press ESC to return to previous menu gt gt Last activated TSI Map LOOP AM3440 A System Setup New map 18 29 51 08 01 2011 TSI Map switch start hr min Mapl DISABLE 00 00 Map2 DISABLE 00 00 Map3 DISABLE 00 00 Map4 DISABLE 00 00 MAP 1 This item will be ignored if anyone of the following is enabled Note when the TSI Map switch function has been selected The upper setting of Change to TSI Map will not function The TSI Map setting shows below is function by Time duration setting Sample below shows Map 1 enable from 00 00 to 11 59 and then it will switch to Map 2 from 12 00 to 23 59 The map3 and map 4 will not function due to disable TSI Map switch Mapl ENABLE Map2 ENABLE Map3 DISABLE Map4 DISABLE start hr min 00 1 2 00 00 00 00 00 00 You can view the TSI Map setting from Controller Menu gt C System Configuration gt C Current TSI Map 6 2 7 6 Copy a TSI Map to another Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt E Copy a TSI Map to Another This function
32. Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 3 8 Clear Current Port Performance Data To clear current port performance data press X SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 Port Menu 18 35 45 03 01 2001 gt gt Clear Performance Data Y N 6 3 9 Return to Default Press Y to return to default SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 Port Menu 18 35 45 03 01 2001 gt gt Return to default are you sure Y N 6 3 10 Reset Current DTE Board To reset DTE board press Z SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 Port Menu 18 35 45 03 01 2001 gt gt Reset Board 9 Y N 108 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 4 ATM Frame Relay Sub Menu Under the Controller Menu press U to choose a slot for the ATM FR port Then the following screen will show SLOT D ATM FR El Port Menu 09 41 53 09 13 2002 Version SW V3 03 01 03 2002 DISPLAY SETUP 1 gt Unit 1 Hour Perf Report L gt Unit Loopback Setup 2 gt Unit 24 Hour Perf Report M gt Unit Alarm Setup A gt Unit Statistics S gt Unit System Setup C o Unit Configuration X gt Unit Clear Alarm Queue amp History H Unit Alarm History K gt Unit Clear Performance Data I gt Unit Status D gt Unit Upgrade Firmware Q gt Unit Alarm Queue LOG MISC U gt Choose a Port Y gt Unit Load Default Config E gt Log Off SETUP MISC Menu Z Unit Reset O gt Log On SETUP MISC Menu E Return to Controller Main Menu gt
33. Humidity Up to 90 RH non condensing ANSI T1 410 AT amp T Pub 62319 AT amp T Pub 62310 ITU T V 54 ITU G 703 64 Kbps co directional interface 120ohm RJ48 Up to 500 meters Loopack DTE Payload Loopback Local Loopback C37 94 Interface Source LED Wavelength 820 nm 2Km reach Conncetor ST Optical Budget Dry Contact Interface 50 Mircon core 9 6 db 62 5 Mircon core 15db Inputs Outputs 8 channel 2 port per card 4 pair per port 8 channel 8 pair per card Connector RJ45 Connector Screw type Internal Resistance 1K Initial Insulation Resistance Min 100M ohm at 500 Vdc Activation Current 3 ma Max Current 5A Deactivation Current 1 5 ma Max Voltage 100 Vdc 250 Vac Allowable Current 4 ma Chapter 1 Product Description Contact current A 10 30 100 Dry Contact Type B Interface Contact voltage V Inputs Outputs 8 channel 2 port per card 4 pair per port 8 channel 8 pair per card Connector RJ45 Connector Screw type Internal Resistance 100 K Initial Insulation Resistance Min 1000M ohm at 500 Vdc Activation Current 3 ma Max Current 2A Deactivation Current 1 5 ma Max Voltage 220 Vdc 250 Vac Allowable Current 4 ma Voice Card Q2EM Q4EM Connector Alarm Conditioning Encoding Impedance Longitudinal Conversion Loss Longitudinal Balance Gain
34. NOTE When an AM3440 has two controller plug in cards on applying power the left controller CTRL1 will always be the primary and the right controller CTRL 2 will always be the redundant If the redundant card s configuration is different from the primary the redundant CTRL will synchronize its configuration from the primary CTRL after the boot up and initiation process This synchronized takes 1 2 minutes During configuration synchronization the LED will show the following sequence 1 LED for primary CTRL power green active flashing green 2 LED for redundant CTRL power flashing green active dark Redundant CTRL will send heart beat every 0 5 second After 5 consecutive no response from primary CTRL meaning primary CTRL dead redundant CTRL will take over AM3440 and become primary Primary warm restart reset will not switch control back to the left CTRL while Primary cold restart will switch Switching time is less than 50ms Condition To avoid sync failure the brand and the firmware version of CTRL1 and CTRL2 should be the same AM Sr O S E E E E E E E E1 T1 2 Eta E1T1 B oo E1 T1 E1 T1 Dam Buu Buu PE E O O O O O O A O a T St ESTEE ES E S DoODODODODO S Ooooo0o0o0o000 S oooo000000 S DODODoODoDo Denern DIO Main Access DCS Mux Shelf Front Side l3NH3Hl3 V g N o
35. SHDSL 2 pairs with line 5 N A 25 power Fan tray required 4 channel G SHDSL 1 pair with line 5 N A 33 power Fan tray required Fan tray 0 N A 12 Note CTRL controller N A Not Applicable W Watt and w o without To calculate actual power consumption including power used to drive telephone and remote unit through line power Condition 1 If total power consumption of device and plug in cards is less than 60 Watts an additional fan try is not required Number of Plug in cards Used Power Consumption Watt 2 controllers 4 8 2 1 channel E1 cards 2 4 5 12 channel FXS cards 3 15 Total 27 Watts Condition 2 If total power consumption of device and plug in cards is more than 60 Watts an additional fan try is required 2 controllers 4 4 1 channel E1 cards 22 2 4 channel E1 cards 3 2 Router B cards 6 8 4 channel G SHDSL w o line power 5 Total Number of Plug in cards Used Power Consumption Watt 8 8 6 12 40 74 Watts Condition 3 for G SHDSL with line power plug in card only The fan try is required for all G SHDSL cards with line power cards due to higher heat density dissipation in the slot 206 Table 14 2 Power Consumption of AM3440 A Plug in cards for 125 Vdc 100W Power Module Chapter 14 Appendix G AM3440 A Power Consumption
36. When the alarm setup is Disabling the alarm relay circuit will stay in the normal state Activated alarm relay can be deactivated by pushing the ACO Alarm Cut Off button Table 2 5 Alarm Relay Circuit Contact State When Alarm Setup is Enable Circuit NC COM NO COM Condition System Power Off Open Alarm On Normal State for Auto Period and Manual Mode Alarm Cut Off or No Alarm Table 2 6 Alarm Relay Circuit Contact State When Alarm Setup is Disable Circuit NC COM NO COM Condition System Power Off Open System Power On Open Alarm On Open Note The maximum voltage for the alarm relay is 48Vdc and the maximum current is 1A 22 Chapter 2 Installation 2 3 5 Fuse Relay The fuse relay will be triggered when the condition of the power supply changes ON OFF For example when the power is ON NC will open relative to COM and NO shorted relative to COM If the fuse in the power supply card is brown OFF NC will be shorted relative to COM and NO will be open relative to COM Table 2 7 FUSE Relay Connector Circuit NC COM NO COM Condition System Power Off Open System Power On Short 2 3 6 Jumper Location for Mini Quad E1 card Mini QE1 Card LL oF Figure 2 8 Jumper Location for Mini Quad E1 Interface 23 Chapter 2 Installation Table 2 8 Circuit protection for Mini Quad E1 Interface
37. gt SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command gt 6 4 4 1 Hour Performance Report 6 4 1 1 ATM Frame Relay T1 Press 1 from the port menu the following screen will show To view ATM FR T1 port 1 hour performance report by selecting registers type USER or LINE The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk SLOT D ATM FR T1 Port 1 Hour Perf Report 17 17 44 07 21 2002 gt gt Select Register Type USER LINE SLOT D ATM FR T1 Port 1 Hour Perf Report 17 17 49 07 21 2002 USER Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 290 seconds ES UAS BES SES 2038 LOFC Current 15 Min Interval EE 0 0 0 0 0 Ist Nearest 15 Min Interval 2nd Nearest L5 Min Interval i HERA ADM Omm A GEM 3rd Nearest 15 Min Interval i gt caes css AA Deme ASA 4th Nearest 15 Min Interwal 24335 c cum VSS deem Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval O0 ES UAS BES SES CSS LOFC Current 24 Hour Interval id lt lt TAB key to show Statistics Report gt gt lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt 109 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation SLOT D ATM FR T1 Port l Hour Stat Report 17 18 05 07 21 2002 USER Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 290 seconds AS SEFS SES SBES SSES CSS SLOFC Current 15 Min 100 00 100 00 0 000
38. lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 138 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 5 3 Unit Line Availability Under Port Menu press A to view the line availability as the following screen shows SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port Line Availability 10 23 56 10 27 2004 Line Availability during Last 24 Hour Valid Seconds 849 seconds Available Seconds 849 seconds Unavailable Seconds 0 seconds Line Avaliability o LOM Us lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 6 5 4 Unit Configuration To view the unit configuration press C from Port Menu then the screen will show as below SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port System Setup 10 24 14 10 27 2004 FRAME ON CODE HDB3 CRC ON RAI ON AIS FRAMED CAS OFF SIGNALLING TRANS CGA NORM OOS BUSY FDL OFF Sa_bit Sa4 IDLE D5 Protected DISABLE Master St SRR INTE 120 Ohm lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt Note FDL can be enabled in a maximum of 2 ports 139 6 5 5 Unit Status Press I from Port Menu to show the screen of Unit Status as below Chapter 6 Terminal Operation gt TINE LOS LOF RCV RCV XMT XMT BPV ES TEST AIS RAI AIS RAI ERROR COUNT NO NO NO NO NO NO SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 ERROR COUNT 4 PATTERN TRANSMITTED NEAR END LOOPBACK Port St
39. 0l D Non revertible Note d v means data or voice mode 6 2 2 Clock Source Configuration Controller Menu gt B Clock source Configuration This function shows the current clock source configuration info LOOP AM3440 A Clock Source Setup Normal Mode 18 19 18 08 03 2011 Master Clk Source INTERNAL Clock Hold Over OFF Second Clk Source INTERNAL Hold Over State Normal Current Clock MASTER CLK Frame Pulse Period 8001 2 Hz Clk Recover Mode MANUAL Clock Status NORMAL Ext Clock Type El1 750hm Dual External Clock Protection Disable lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 6 2 3 Alarm Queue Summary Controller Menu gt Q Alarm Queue Summary This function is to view the Alarm Queue Summary LOOP AM3440 A Alarm Queue Summary 18 21 00 08 03 2011 1 Controller SLOT 9 STARTUP ASS e Ss 19 03 10 03 01 2001 2 Controller PRIMARY START UP 19 03 07 03 01 2001 lt lt SPACE bar to refresh or ESC key return to main menu gt gt 55 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 4 Information Summary Controller Menu gt I Information Summary This function displays the current information of all plug in cards The unplugged means the registered card has been unplugged To clear the unplugged wording from the screen go to Controller Menu gt S System gt J Clear Empty Slot and select the slot you want to clear T
40. 11 Unassigned 12 Unassigned 14a Unassigned 14 JUnassigned 16 Unassigned tg Unassigned Unassigned SG 23 Unassigned 27 Chapter 2 Installation Table 2 13 DB25 Mini Quad E1 Pin Definition 1 Transmit DataTIP_Portt 2 ReceiveDataTiP_Pott Z 3 Unassigned 4 TransmitDataTIP_Port2 Z 5 jReceveDataTIP Pot2 o 6 Unassigned E cj 7 TransmitDataTIP_Port3 Z 8 JReceveDataTIP Pot3 Z 9 Unassigned 10 TransmitDataTIP Porta 11 QReceveDataTIP Pot4 12 Unassigned as Unassigned so 14 TransmitDataRING Portt Z 15 Receive Data RING Pott 16 Unassigned 17 TransmitDataRING_Pot2 18 Receive Data RING Pot2 tg Unassigned 20 TrasmiDataRING Port3 21 JReceveDataRING Pot3 Unassigned EE 23 TransmitDataRING_Pot4 2 ReceveDataRING Pot4 25 Unassigned o Table 2 14 Default Software Configuration _____ConsolePort Fea DtaBi 8 4 Stop Bi Parity Bit NONE AXONEXORE Interface TERMINAL SUME 28 Chapter 2 Installation DTE V 35 V 36 ElA530 X 21 V 11 Item RTS Activate V 35 INTERFACE q V 36 Depend on which DTE plug in card is EIA530 RS449 plugged into the shelf X 21 V 11 ATM FRATI Line tems Dean O Melaous JO Doen LOOF LOOP ANE3440 29 Chapter 2 Inst
41. 126 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 127 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 128 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 16 16 256 256 256 0 2 2 0 17 256 256 256 0 3 3 18 18 64 64 64 0 4 4 0 19 64 64 64 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu available DLCI 16 991 gt gt The procedure for modifying this table is the same as for the FR ATM protocol 6 4 12 Clear Alarm Queue and History Press X to clear alarm queue and history then enter Y or N to confirm it LOOP AM3440 A Controller Menu 18 03 32 10 08 2009 Serial Number Te S26 Redundant Controller Enabled Hardware Version Ver J Start Time 11 25 29 10 08 2009 Software Version V8 05 01 09 29 2009 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A DISPLAY SETUP C gt System Configuration S gt System Setup B gt Clock source Configuration M gt System Alarm Setup Q gt Alarm Queue Summary W gt Firmware Transfer I gt Information Summary V gt Store Retrieve Configuration R Redundant Board Information K Clock source Setup P gt Performance Report T gt Bit Error Rate Test LOG MISC U gt Choose a Slot A Alarm Cut Off F gt Log Off SETUP MISC Menu X Clear Alarm Queue O gt Log On SETUP MISC Menu Y gt Controller Return to Default Z gt Controller Reset gt gt Clear alarm queue of PORT D are you sure Y N
42. 24h loop1 319 gshdsl htuc es 24h loop2 320 gshdsl htur es 24h loop 1 321 gshdsl htur es 24h loop2 322 gshdsl htuc e1t1 es 24h 323 gshdsl htur e1t1 es 24h 324 gshdsl htuc ses 24h loop1 325 gshdsl htuc ses 24h loop2 326 gshdsl htur ses 24h loop1 327 gshdsl htur ses 24h loop2 328 gshdsl htuc e1t1 ses 24h 329 gshdsl htur e1t1 ses 24h 330 gshdsl sealing current 331 gshdsl mclk loss 332 gshdsl htuc dte rts 333 gshdsl htur dte rts 334 gshdsl htuc dte extclk 335 gshdsl htur dte extclk 336 gshdsl dying gasp alarm 337 gshdsl loop attenu alarm 338 gshdsl low noise margin 339 gshdsl htur link down 340 12 FOM Card 1FOM A Card Vendor Spec 20 Assigned fom opt local lof 601 fom opt local los 602 fom opt local rai 603 fom opt remote lof 604 fom opt remote los 605 166 ES UAS CSS Alarm type LOS Alarm type LOS MASTER LOOP1 LOS MASTER LOOP2 LOS SLAVE LOOP1 LOS SLAVE LOOP2 LOS LOF MASTER E1 LOS LOF SLAVE E1 ES15M MASTER LOOP1 ES15M MASTER LOOP2 ES15M SLAVE LOOP1 ES15M SLAVE LOOP2 ES15M MASTER E1 ES15M SLAVE E1 SES15M MASTER LOOP1 SES15M MASTER LOOP2 SES15M SLAVE LOOP1 SES15M SLAVE LOOP2 SES15M MASTER E1 SES15M SLAVE E1 ES24H MASTER LOOP1 ES24H MASTER LOOP2 ES24H SLAVE LOOP1 ES24H SLAVE LOOP2 ES24H MASTER E1 ES24H SLAVE E1 SES24H MASTER LOOP1 SES24H MASTER LOOP2 SES24H SLAVE LOOP1 SES24H SLAVE LOOP2 SES24H MASTER E1 SES24H SLAVE E1 SEALING CURRENT MCLK LOSS RTS MASTER DTE RTS SL
43. 4 6 2 SUPS RE M 44 4 6 3 Using boopback Pl gs 2 io oet terree pices rt teen e be ctt ret rea tede veia uta 44 4 6 4 Using Bert Test SOL ia ioco rt EE ree date 44 55 Front PanelOperallon 2 5 eit ten cti este es tibi dien ita tend ieu temi eS dadas 45 5 1 Refer to AM3440 A LCD separate Manual sss nnns 45 6 Terminal Operation da 46 6 1 Menu Tri a td eene teer ir A A tl dn nie 47 6 2 E NN 48 6 2 1 Controller CONTIQUratiON aii da 48 6 2 1 1 UM tee poten 49 6 2 1 2 Clock SOUrCC i 5rd deii etre e e eds aee ce Rn 49 6 2 1 3 TS Maps EE 51 6 2 1 4 Current ISl Map usina 52 6 2 1 5 Power F an Statuss to A ineo RU teu a 53 6 2 1 6 Link backup T nctlon 2 m reet em abies dte eee tee Mese dde tud 54 6 2 1 7 QDS AA 1 iprotectlom tnter Lb eU ids 54 6 2 1 8 DSO SNGP Status niente de Deoa euni 55 6 2 2 Clock Source Configuration 5 iR Ende eee ae RU ed Eee e cus 55 6 2 3 Alarm Queue Summary vetet ph cited BR ctl BER Eres Pd EE een ae Ate 55 6 2 4 Information SUMMA Vicios eter iode Hehe dee est ie Pa agenda 56 6 2 5 Redundant CTRL Information sesssssssssssssssesese eene nennen nennen nennen nn 56 6 2 6 Performance Report oer epe pd e edendi es Pie dE ST AR ehe 57 6 2 7 SYSTEM SOUP TEE 59 6 2 7 1 OYSLOM sis nei ee E 59 6 2 7 2 SNM Riera to ELE ER td Leste I RE vaa 62 6 2 7 3 PassWOrd ama m piede tee fonde I dete ees ac 68 6 2 7 4 Tel Map Setups iier eere EUR ero do
44. 5 Configuration Settings The entire configuration is shown when S gt System Setup is pressed To change any setting use the arrow keys to move to the target setting Then press the TAB key repeatedly to cycle to the desired setting for any selected parameter 32 Chapter 3 Operation 3 2 System Operation 3 2 1 Date AM3440 is equipped with a RTC Real Time Clock User can change the current date and time as necessary RTC also can manage leap year To save RTC battery life the RTC is activated by the manufacturer just before shipping The RTC battery has a 10 years power off life cycle 3 2 2 Master Clock This product has a system clock PLL Phase Lock Loop which may be phase locked to the DS1 line clock or internal clock The default master is the DS1 line clock The default value is Internal NOTE If no DS1 line clock is available Loop AM will automatically switch to the internal clock source Loop AM will automatically switch back to the DS1 line clock when plug in card plug in 3 2 3 Console Port The console port allows the user either to use a local VT 100 terminal via DB9 connector or use a remote VT 100 terminal via modem for system configuration diagnostics polling status reports etc The console port baud data bit length stop bit length parity bit length XON XOFF flow control and interface type are as shown below Table 3 1 Console Port Setting Fixed Seting 9600 Data Length Stop Bi Parity Bi
45. 6 2 10 Store Retrieve Configuration oooonnncccnnnncccccnnnococnnnnnccnnnn nono nnn nono n nennen nennen ener nnne 93 6 2 11 Clock Source Setup 7 eee ete tenete eec epe reu de ee aie 95 6 2 12 Bit Error Rate Test ore pedore eee A eee obe ev e t e degna 101 6 2 13 Alarm ReSO E x I 102 6 2 14 Clear Alarm QUEUE ica 102 6 2 15 Returnito Default sessao sure serena ainda A Ra ee Lea HQ TR Nebo 102 6 2 16 Controller Reset pne A A a cete aces Aneel aS 102 6 3 DTE V 35 Sub Menu idas de da 103 6 3 1 DTE Configuration terrre eet eed etre dede i dee ee eee be edo hd ede bee ide d te 103 6 3 2 DT ESCUUDIM Ep 105 6 3 3 Alarm FUSTO 2 Loose tette eti toute eme Seton Ee eius tb qe iia ia 105 6 3 4 SV SICHHIESIZUISESPESDET CET I T LIT ETE 106 6 3 5 IKerolelerzie Sa p 106 6 3 6 A 107 6 3 7 Upgrade Firmmware terere reat tierce siete etur eo pie ette y Deseret Eo ebd reus 107 6 3 8 Clear Current Port Performance Data oooooocccccccccccocococcccconccononononccnnnnnnnnnnno nn ncnnnnnnnnnnnn nanette nn 108 6 3 9 Feturmto Default reri ha ht rh dicas 108 6 3 10 Reset Current DTE Board iieri eet d et ea tee i Mule dada ee it iaaa lig 108 6 4 ATM Frame Relay Sub Menu oie teen dd 109 6 4 1 1 Hour Performance Report ssssssssssssssssesseseeeremeen eren nennen 109 6 4 1 1 ATM Frame Relay T1 3 niei ied d
46. 9600 8 n 1 and that a proper null modem or a null modem cable is used LOOP AM3440 A Controller Menu 17 14 50 08 03 2011 Serial Number 3 d12 3921 Redundant Controller Disabled Hardware Version Ver J Start Time dll 08720342011 Software Version V8 18 01 08 02 2011 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A DISPLAY SETUP C gt System Configuration S gt System Setup B Clock source Configuration M gt System Alarm Setup Q gt Alarm Queue Summary W Firmware Transfer Information Summary V gt Store Retrieve Configuration R Redundant CTRL Information K gt Clock source Setup P gt Performance Report T gt Bit Error Rate Test LOG MISC U gt Choose a Slot A gt Alarm Cut Off F gt Log Off SETUP MISC Menu X gt Clear Alarm Queue O gt Log On SETUP MISC Menu Y gt Controller Return to Default Z gt Controller Reset gt gt SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command gt 6 2 1 Controller Configuration Press C from the Controller Menu the screen of System Configuration will show as below LOOP AM3440 A Controller Configuration 13 40 00 04 29 2011 A gt System B gt Clock Source C gt TSI map D gt Current TSI map gt Power Fan Status Link Backup Function QDS1 1 1 Protection DSO SNCP Status R PDH Ring Protection Status o Q lt lt Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command gt gt Note P
47. A DISPLAY SETUP C gt System Configuration S gt System Setup B gt Clock source Configuration M gt System Alarm Setup O gt Alarm Queue Summary W gt Firmware Transfer I gt Information Summary V gt Store Retrieve Configuration R gt Redundant CTRL Information K gt Clock source Setup P gt Performance Report T gt Bit Error Rate Test LOG MISC U gt Choose a Slot A gt Alarm Cut Off F gt Log Off SETUP MISC Menu X Clear Alarm Queue O gt Log On SETUP MISC Menu Y gt Controller Return to Default Z gt Controller Reset 56 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 6 Performance Report Press P from the Controller Menu then press A to access DSO SNCP performance report LOOP AM3440 A Performance Report 18 24 52 08 03 2011 A gt DSO SNCP Performance lt lt Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command gt gt DSO SNCP report is the 7 days performance data of the settled DS0 SNCP protection group The sample screen below shows the system now has five working DSO SNCP groups You can see the timeslot elapsed seconds of the protected slot and port LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Performance Report 18 04 15 10 08 2009 Idx Protected AS S P TS Elapsed Today 10 07 10 06 10 05 10 04 10 03 10 02 10 01 1 A 001 165 82 A o A A A 2 A 002 165 82 3 A 0 03 165 82 4 A 004 165 82 5 A 0 05 165 82 Before y
48. Adjustment all port settings Signal Distortion Frequency Response Idle Channel Noise Signaling In band signaling tones Modems Voice Card 8EM Connector Alarm Conditioning Encoding Impedance Gain Adjustment Per port setting IO Power Range Gain Variation Frequency Response Longitudinal Conversion Loss Total Distortion Idle Channel Noise Carrier Connection Wire Mode Signaling Modems DB44 connector with external DB44 to 4 RJ45 connector cable CGA busy after 2 5 seconds of LOS LOF A law or u law user selectable per card Balanced 600 ohm or 9000hm gt 46dB gt 63dB Normal mode 0 3 6 or 7 dB for transmit D A gain 0 3 6 or 10 dB for receive A D gain gt 25dB with 1004 Hz OdBm input 0 5 to 0 9db from 300 to 3400 Hz Max 65 dBm0p Type I Il Ill IV V and TO Transmit Only signaling options manufacture option Side A or B manufacture option Wire 2 wire or 4 wire manufacture option transparent Full compatibility with V 90 modems Eight RJ45 CGA busy after 2 5 seconds of LOS LOF A law or law user selectable together for all Balanced 600 or 900 ohms 16 to 7 dB 0 1dB step for transmit D A gain 16 to 14 dB 0 1dB step for receive A D gain A D Analog input level 66 dBm 0 00039 Vrms 3 dBm 1 09 Vrms D A Analog output level 66 dBm 0 00039 Vrms 4 dBm 1 22 Vrms 0 5 dB at O dBm0 input 0 5 dB at O dBm0 input gt 46dB gt 35
49. B A LINE 13 B A LINE 14 A LINE 15 B A LINE 16 B uu ui cut i T A LE GT a du Kk e Bj p me pa Chapter 2 Installation 2 Installation CAUTION e Only qualified service personnel shall install and maintain the system e This equipment must be connected to an earth socket outlet which has a permanent connection to protective earth with a cross sectional area of not less than 2 5 mm e Ensure protective earthing connected before install uninstall telephone wires e Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm e Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations
50. BERT Bit Error Rate Test is used to diagnose channel connection with predetermined stress patterns You can use BERT at one end with a loopback at the remote end or in pairs with one at either end of a transmission link The loopback test can be set by using hardware loopback or software loopback command path 3E1 Unit Menu L Unit Loopback Setup The example below shows the setup procedure of BERT at Device A with a loopback at Device B Device A Interconnected Unit Slot 7 Primary Slot C Protected Interface Data Slot 8 3E1 Port 2 Port 1 id Secondary Protected Interface Slot 1 Slot 2 Data Primary Secondary Slot C Device B Interconnected Unit BERT Loopback Test Figure 13 2 Application for BERT and Loopback Diagnosis First lock the data path between the E1 card protected interface of Device A to the E1 card protected interface of Device B On both devices access DSO SNCP setup and use the command Lock on Primary to lock the data path Command Path Controller Menu gt K DSO SNCP Setup Action Status 201 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup On Device A lock the primary data path with the protected E1 card at slot C LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Information 14 32 28 11 19 2010 Please Input decimal number 1 2 BACKSPACE to edit DSO SNCP ENABLE Total DSO SNCP 2
51. Change options by TAB or by typing PDH Ring Protection Ring Station Switching Interval Alarm Filtering Slot Model Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 C jJ a IEEE ii IEEE D MM LLL Lb Mi i edENMESCL LEBEN ERE 1 Quad El ENABUE ENABLE DISABUE DISABLE 2 MEE DEDE Sosssdoo sosssos 3 1 EK iet Kee IEEE TEE 4 EE 1 2 2 J 59 x Jo 1L L L LO 6 ESSASI Sess masasdas SH SS 7 ERARASS ESSSaSS GESSASS JRSSSESE 8 jy Xe mue omen S Rress 9 fases cesso les n s l Dagana 10 a IEEE IEEE 11 jy dessssss espuma Jocsados oreas 12 k essssse Ss 55 asii essze lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt You must now repeat steps 7 and 8 for each of the AM3440 A Slave units in order to complete the PDH Shared Protection Ring setup procedure 175 Chapter 12 Appendix F Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring T1 12 Appendix F Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring T1 12 1 Overview A PDH Shared Protection Ring can be an ideal solution for voice and data transmission networks in that if any one T1 connection is broken the voice and data communication system will still function This protection is made possible by mapping a loopback to where the channel came from In a PDH Shared Protection Ring each line is split in two directions The working line outside line in the diagram below travels in a counter clockwise dir
52. Clock SSM Message 0 External Clock SSM Message 0 Frame Pulse Period 8001 2 Hz1 750hm Clock Hold Over OFF lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu Clock Source Setup SSM Mode Tx Sabit F Rx Sabit Tx Sabit 4 Rx Sabit SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 11 09 22 10 04 2011 4 F The Unit 2 setting screen shown below SLOT_1 P1 is the current clock and top priority for the quality level of its receive Sabit is 4 So the quality level of its transmit Sabit must be F LOOP AM3440 A First Clock Source SLOT 1 Pl Second Clock Source INTERNAL Third Clock Source NONE Current Clock FIRST CLK Clock Status NORMAL Internal Clock SSM Message 0 External Clock SSM Message O0 Frame Pulse Period 8001 2 Hz1 750hm Clock Hold Over OFF lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu Clock Source Setup SSM Mode Tx Sabit ES SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 11 12 36 10 04 2011 Rx Sabit 4 99 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation SSM code for E1 Operation Quality Level Description Quality unknown existing sync network Reserved Rec G 811 Traceable to PRS Reserved SSU A Traceable to SSU type A see G 812 Reserved Reserved Reserved SSU B Traceable to SSU type B see G 812 Reserved Reserved Synchronous Equipment Timing Source SETS Reserved Reserved Reserved TM ODO O W
53. E1 Line Protection In our sample setup we installed Quad E1 cards in slot 9 and slot 10 The card in slot 9 will be working slot and slot 10 will be standing by Go to Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt Q QDS1 1 1 Protection select Setup and press Enter The Setup menu is to setup the protection modes for each protection pair and ports LOOP AM3440 A QDS1 1 1 Protection 17 42 06 08 02 2011 gt gt Select Setup Status On the Setup Screen there are four selection for the user to setup such as disable circuit line non revertive line revertive 1 1 non revertive and 1 1 revertive The sample below is to setup the port 2 of slot 9 10 as LINE NONREV protection and to setup the port 3 of slot 9 10 as 1 1 NONREV protection It means Slot 9 port 2 is protection working port and slot 10 port 2 as backup in LINE Non Revertive mode and Slot 9 port 3 is protection working port and slot 10 port 3 as backup in 1 1 Non Revertive mode LOOP AM3440 A QDS1 1 1 Protection 16 57 54 08 02 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Protect Pair Master Backup Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Slot A B FE1 FE1l DI Slot C D FOM 0 022 222 2222 22202222222 Slot 1 2 QuadE1 Slot 3 4 02 22 22 Slot 5 6 0 222 222 2222 Slot 7 8 O RR
54. ForceSwitch NO NO 2 Slot 11 12 Protection Working Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Slot A B FE1 FEL Slot C D FOM Slot 1 2 QuadE1 Slot 3 4 Slot 5 6 Slot 7 8 Slot 9 10 QuadE1 QuadE1 9 1 9 2 9 3 Slot 11 12 4 i lt lt ESC key ignore and return ENTER key accept change gt gt Function Option Default ForceSwitch NO ForceSwitch NO 159 Chapter 10 Appendix D Loop AM 3440 A Alarm Trap Information 10 Appendix D Loop AM 3440 A Alarm Trap Information 10 1 Trap definition trap MIB localTrap TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE loop AM3440 A VARIABLES ccAlarmQueueString ccAlarmType ccAlarmModel ccAlarmSlot ccAlarmPort ccAlarmSeverity DESCRIPTION Local alarm trap 1 3 removeTrap TRAP TYPE ENTERPRISE loop AM3440 A VARIABLES ccAlarmQueueString ccAlarmType ccAlarmModel ccAlarmSlot ccAlarmPort ccAlarmSeverity DESCRIPTION Local alarm trap remove n 9 161 10 2 SONDA AaAGD0DN 0 Chapter 10 Appendix D Loop AM 3440 A Alarm Trap Information ccAlarmModel Plug in card model type Number Plug in card Type fe1 ft rs232 8 oct rt b v35 x50 dtu 6 dtu 10 mdsl Is optical em fxs router fxo afr e1 afr t1 magneto ocudp quad e1 quad t1 mdsl a v35 a gshdsl 4 gshdsl 2 g703 mquad e1 dry contact fom router a
55. JRRSRSSS AmOcmomeC I mem o qcmomem 10 ORE mir ani ir A euer deles T d M MER LL ERAS LEE ie I2 je cC MAA CLIE iL i lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Comment Option Default PDH Ring Protection Enable Disable Disable Switching Interval 5 to 99 5 Ring Station Slave Master Slave Alarm Filtering 0 to 180 second 0 Note Alarm Filtering function is only available to QE1 QT1 and Mini QE1 cards 74 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 7 15 PDH Ring Diagnostic Follow the command path Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt T PDH Ring Diagnostic to access PDH Ring Protection LOOP AM3440 A PDH Ring Diagnostic 17 04 27 07 09 2009 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Slot Model Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 C Je eedem avessas a as DA Co o 1 QuadEl ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE zd LRL n Q1 1i Ree GRASSA 3c wd o O 0 A 0 m mmm 4 M omm memi mmm mm m 4 MEME LLL oM oa M LL s 6 MEM LL LLL Zn D ansa e aa 7 is ais 8 a Ml a emenn 9 jo eo mmm mimm i cmm 10 a Ns aaa a a aia il d a eem 12 mimo L 5 2 AME li lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 6 2 7 16 SNTP Setup Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt N SNTP Setup This function is SNTP server setup Simple Network Timing Protocol SNTP is an adaptation of the Net
56. Menu when the redundant Controller Reset function is complete Now the software version has upgraded to V8 19 01 LOOP AM3440 A Controller Menu 10 57 37 12 13 2011 Serial Number 123567 Redundant Controller Enabled Hardware Version Ver J Start Time t 10 48 31 12 13 2011 Software Version We 19001 12 13 2011 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A DISPLAY SETUP C System Configuration S System Setup B gt Clock source Configuration M gt System Alarm Setup Q gt Alarm Queue Summary W gt Firmware Transfer I gt Information Summary V gt Store Retrieve Configuration R Redundant CTRL Information K gt Clock source Setup P gt Performance Report T gt Bit Error Rate Test LOG MISC U gt Choose a Slot A gt Alarm Cut Off F gt Log Off SETUP MISC Menu X gt Clear Alarm Queue O gt Log On SETUP MISC Menu Y gt Controller Return to Default Z Controller Reset gt gt SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command gt 92 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 10 Store Retrieve Configuration Under the Controller Menu press V to store or retrieve the current configuration as the following screen shows Use TAB key to select STORE or RETRIEVE press ENTER The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk Store Configuration LOOP AM3440 A Store Retrieve Configuration 19 09 51 03 01 2001 gt gt Select STORE RETRIEVE Then
57. Polling Interval User Network Bidirection 5 30 seconds Acts as user side device periodically issues polling messages to network side Acts as network side device waits for polling messages from user side This channel can issue polling messages and respond to polling messages The interval between Status Inquiry messages from user to network else error counted T392 Response time 5 30 seconds The max allowed interval between Status Inquiry and network response else error counted N391 PVC Polling Interval 1 255 seconds The interval between PVC Status Inquiry messages from user to network else error counted N392 Error count Determine service affecting condition by detecting N392 errors in the last N393 events N393 Error count See N392 These parameters must be coordinated with the ATM network parameters Important The procedure for changing Port FR Management setting which has been saved in the 127 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation system are 1 Go to Port Connection Table Setup screen as the 2nd screen shows 2 Then change CH from 04 to 00 as the 8rd screen shows 3 Go back to Port FR Management Setup screen as 1st screen shows to change the previous setting 1st screen SLOT D ATM FR El Port FR Management Setup 10 25 33 09 13 2002 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS CH Active Protocol Di
58. QE1 Mini QE1 3E1 Card Vendor Spec 9 QT1 Card Vendor Spec Assigned e1 rai 201 e1 ais 202 e1 los 203 e1 lof 204 e1 bpv 205 e1 es 206 e1 uas 207 e1 css 208 ais ins 209 Assigned t1 yel 221 t1 ais 222 t1 los 223 t1 lof 224 t1 bpv 225 165 LOS MASTER LOOP LOS SLAVE LOOP ES15M MASTER LOOP ES15M SLAVE LOOP SES15M MASTER LOOP SES15M SLAVE LOOP ES24H MASTER LOOP ES24H SLAVE LOOP SES24H MASTER LOOP SES24H SLAVE LOOP MCLK LOSS SEALING CURRENT Alarm type RAI or YEL AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS CSS ATM LOS ATM AIS ATM RDI ATM LOC FRLKD Alarm type RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS CSS AIS INSERT Alarm type YEL AIS LOS LOF BPV Chapter 10 Appendix D Loop AM 3440 A Alarm Trap Information 10 G 703 Card Vendor Spec 20 11 G shdsl Card Vendor Spec t1 es 226 t1 uas 227 t1 css 228 Assigned g703 los 541 Assigned gshdsl htuc los loop1 301 gshdsl htuc los loop2 302 gshdsl htur los loop 1 303 gshdsl htur los loop2 304 gshdsl htuc e1t1 los lof 305 gshdsl htur e1t1 los lof 306 gshdsl htuc es 15m loop1 307 gshdsl htuc es 15m loop2 308 gshdsl htur es 15m loop1 309 gshdsl htur es 15m loop2 310 gshdsl htuc e1t1 es 15m 311 gshdsl htur e1t1 es 15m 312 gshdsl htuc ses 15m loop1 313 gshdsl htuc ses 15m loop2 314 gshdsl htur ses 15m loop1 315 gshdsl htur ses 15m loop2 316 gshdsl htuc e1t1 ses 15m 317 gshdsl htur e1t1 ses 15m 318 gshdsl htuc es
59. Receive Input Imdednace Receiver Sensitivity Dynamic Range Pulse Amplitude Sealing Current Operating Modes Circuit Rates Encoding and decoding rules Maintenance control Fault and Performance Enviroment Specification Standard Co directional Interface Interface Connector Line Distance 8 Ports for each card Per Port 1 dual color LED Red for LOS Green for SYNC RJ48S Tip Ring and Tip1 Ring1 135 Ohms 20 135 Ohms 20 0 to 43 dB loop loss at 72K amp 56K 0 to 34 all other rates Automatic line equalization 1 5V 10 peak all rates except 9 6K 0 75 10 peak at 9 6K Bipolar Return to zero 50 duty cycle Typically 16mA DC 4 wire DDS Switched 56 support is optional SYNC 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 56 72 kbps 64k clear channel Conforms with AT amp T Pub 41458 Use bipolar violation to indicate control information Idle out of service Zero Subsitution using unframed loops DSU Non latching loop back code for 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 56k circuit rate DSU Latching loop back TIP LSC LBE FEV code for 72k circuit rate Machine maintenance OCU DP card operation Payload loopback OCU loopback Local loopback Bi directional loopback V 54 remote loopback code Custom defined remote loopback code BERT test support all ones all zeros 2047 511 63 pattern LOS OOS ES SES and UAS alarm Current last 96 registry and 7 days performance storage Operating 0 50 C Storage 25 75 C
60. Ring Voltage 2 sec on 4 sec off or 1 sec on 2 sec off optional for PLAR Loop Start DTMF pulse PLAR Battery Reverse Ground Start Metering pulse 12 KHz 16 KHz and P in PLAR mode PLAR signalling bits are programmable Programable bit e All in band signaling tones are carried transparently by the digitizing process e Customer is responsible for in band signaling compatibility between a telephone and a switch or between a PBX and a switch 24Vdc power is for FXS PCB version L and up 10 Chapter 1 Product Description Phone Line Monitor Card Connector Four RJ11 connectors Alarm Conditioning CGA busy after 2 5 seconds of LOS LOF Encoding A law or u law user selectable as a group Impedance Balanced 15K Ohm Total Distortion gt 35dB with 1004 Hz OdBm input Frequency Response 0 0 5 dB from 300 to 2000 Hz 0 5 dB 2 dB from 2000 to 3300 Hz Idle Channel Noise gt 60 dBmO Gain Adjustment 0 3 6 or 7 dB for PLM B transmit gain D A All Port Setting 0 3 6 or 3dB for PLM A receive gain A D Off Hook Detect Level 6V Line to GND Operational Temp 0 C to 50 C Relative Humidity 0 to 95 Power 110 220 VAC 48 Vdc All in band signaling tones are carried transparently by the digitizing process Signaling Bits Normal AB Bit Invert Tx Rx Tx Rx Status A B C D JA B C D IA BIC Lin
61. Setup 183 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup 13 2 Setup Procedures 1 Clock Setup Press K from the main menu to access Clock Source Setup Choose a connected 3E1 port as the master clock source and the other 3E1 port as the secondary clock source When the master clock source is lost the clock source will automatically switch to the secondary If the secondary is also lost the internal clock will take over The function of the Clock Holdover Mode is to use stored data to maintain clock accuracy when the master clock loses its controlling input In our example Device A should be Internal clock and Device B and C should be in Clock Holdover Mode The master clock source for device B is Slot 2 port2 and for C device is Slot 3 port 1 Below is a setup sample for Device B LOOP AM3440 A System Setup CLOCK Normal Mode 14 44 20 10 15 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Master Clk Source SLOT 2 P2 Clock Hold Over ON Second Clk Source SLOT 1 P2 Current Clock MASTER CLK Clk Recover Mode AUTO Clock Status NORMAL Ext Clock Type E1 750hm Dual External Clock Protection Disable lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 184 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup 2 Building Cross Connections First build cross connections for the interconnected units Device A and Device B For Device A follow the command path main menu S System Setup gt K DSO SNCP setup On th
62. Source INTERNAL EXTERNAL Line Interface INTERNAL Current Clock MASTER CLK SECOND CLK INTERNAL MASTER CLK CIk Recover Mode AUTOMATIC MANUAL MANUAL Ext Clock Type Dual External Clock Protection E1 75 ohm E1 120 ohm T1 2048 KHz 75 ohm 2048 KHz 120 ohm Disable Enable E1 75 ohm Disable Clock Hold Over Note ON OFF OFF 1 Clock Hold Over option is for 3E1 plug in card only It appears on VT100 screen when the controller hardware version J and software version 8 02 01 or newer version 2 Clock Hold Over mode is configured to OFF The operation of system clock show as below When the master clock loss occurs the system clock will switch to secondary clock When the secondary clock loss occurs the system clock will switch to internal clock Clock Hold Over mode is configured to ON The operation of system clock has shown as below When the frequency accuracy of system clock is over 198 ppm the system clock will enter to Hold Over mode When the frequency accuracy of system clock is lower than 198 ppm the system clock will track the reference clock Note1 Line Interface includes Quad E1 T1 mini Quad E1 FOM and 1FOMA card 96 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation B For SSM Synchronous Status Message Clock Mode Under the Controller Setup menu press A to get in System Setup SYSTEM menu as below screen shows Use arrow keys to move the
63. Status 17 28 09 08 03 2011 Power 1 Status 48V 100W DC Power 2 Status N A Total Maximum power consumption Estimation 26W Fan 1 Status Good Fan 2 Status Good lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt LOOP AM3440 A Power Fan Status 17 28 09 08 03 2011 Power 1 Status 48V 100W DC Power 2 Status N A Total Maximum power consumption Estimation 26W Fan 1 Status Fail or not exist Fan 2 Status Fail or not exist lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt Note Power consumption table shows below to estimate total power consumption and detect power plug in card status Power consumption does not include 48V DC power supply consumption Table 6 1 Power consumption Condition Total Power DC Power Alarm Trap Warning message Consumption Supplies EOS NO FAN Any External fan tray is necessary Please add a fan tray or FAN Failure Single 100W Power supplies over loading Please remove plugged in Dual 100W Power protection not supported plug in cards or upgrade to SOM 100W 150W Power protection not supported 150W power supplies Dual 150W Normal Single 150W Power supplies over loading gt 135W i Please remove plugged in E 100W 150W Power protection not supported cads or upgrade Dual 150W Power protection not supported 53 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 1
64. Switch Mode Non revertible Confirm Yes lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 73 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Note PDH Ring Protection and PDH Ring Diagnostic are optional functions To access theses two optional functions you must order the controller card with PDH function or these two functions will not show on the VT100 menu Also only QE1 QT1 1FOMA FOM and Mini QE1 plug in cards support PDH function 6 2 7 14 PDH Ring Protection Follow the command path Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt R PDH Ring Protection to access PDH Ring Protection Enable PDH ring protection and set up the switching interval station type and alarm filtering LOOP AM3440 A PDH Ring Protection 18 10 53 02 16 2012 ARROW KEYS Cursor move Change options by TAB or by typing PDH Ring Protection ENABLE Ring Station SLAVE Switching Interval 05 Alarm Filtering 030 Slot Model Port Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 A MQuad El DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE B MEE mee Es t EIE rir oo BS doces D f ECCE REC ase MEE L Quad El ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE 2 Quad El DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE 3 Quad El DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE 4 Exi a E apri ELE rri E rU E EU DE 5 FOM ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE Or ol tease Ms Mn eso To ow ey RMS ELE E D g sl a a E ama 9 ju
65. TALA A lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Channel Map Setup Select the CH MAP item on the Port System Setup menu Use this channel map to tell the ATM FR card what time slots are combined to be a logical frame relay channel FR channel The logical FR channel number can be 1 to 31 eg FR 1 to FR 31 A 0 will indicate an idle time slot SLOT Tim FR Channel Tim FR Channel D ATM FR El e Slot e Slot 0X3 02 0 3 01 01 01 ld LS 49 00 00 00 04 05 01 02 20 21 06 02 22 07 02 2 3 00 08 02 24 Port Channel Map Setup Please Input 1 10 BACKSPACE to edit 09 10 11 12 03 03 03 03 25 26 27 28 00 00 00 00 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 13 04 29 00 14 00 30 10 17 28 09 13 2002 15 16 00 00 31 00 131 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Frame Relay Management Setup FR to FR Select the FR_MAN item on the Port System Setup menu Use this management setup to tell the protocol details of the ATM network The logical channel number can be 1 to 31 The meanings of the parameters are the same as for FR to ATM SLOT D ATM FR E Port FR Management Setup 10 18 27 09 13 2002 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS CH Active Protocol Direction T391 T392 N391 N392 N393 T1 E1 FR ITU User 0 5 006 03 04 1 YES FR ITU Network 0 5 006
66. Uhvatp aa gt Print Clear ARP table Ping 4p SS AAA gt Ping an ip address thank 223 5254 5 gt Display or set firmware bank in Flash Choot TRAS gt Download boot up code DANGER SYSLOG IS gt Dump system log auto save sec gt Display or set auto save time inactive sec gt Display or set detect time for card inactive pdh spring 2 Enable PDH SPRing need charge for password upgrade qel qtl gshdsl gt Batch download firmware of QE1 QT1 G sdhsl card mdsl dte gt Batch download firmware of MDSL DTE card dtu rs232 A Soe gt Batch download firmware of DTU10 RS232 card 18 37 11 Aug 01 11 gt gt 70 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 7 9 Init New Card Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt I Init New Card This function is to initiate the new card Below sample screen shows the status of Slot B and Slot D are mismatch Then select B and press Enter Type Y for confirmation LOOP AM3440 A Init a New Card 18 53 43 08 01 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Slot Model State Slot Model State A FEL 5 FE1 mismatch 6 FOM mismatch 8 9 Quad El 10 Quad El 11 12 BwWNHr OOD This command will clear the related TSI and init the unit with default Select Slot B gt gt Are you sure Y N After the initialize procedure completed go to Controller Menu gt 1 Information Summary to check the
67. Write firmware file to flash 57 ENTER key accept change gt gt 85 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 9 2 Application of upload download configuration The configuration of a properly set up AM3440 device can be quickly uploaded to a TFTP server and then downloaded to other AM3440 devices even if they are not loaded with plug in cards This simplifies the set up for mass deployment of new devices each with same plug in plug in cards and same configuration By using the I command in the controller menu of one of the newly deployed devices a user can retrieve the plug in card types for which the downloaded configuration will need The sample screen is shown below LOOP AM3440 A Information Summary Slot Card Interface Serial Software Version A FEL 1200hm N A V4 02 05 12 17 2010 B FE1 1200hm N A V3 05 01 09 21 2007 C D 1 Quad El V3 test2 06 17 2011 2 3 4 5 FOM N A 6 FOM N A 7 8 9 10 Quad El 010594 V3 test2 06 17 2011 11 12 lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to r 14 52 20 09 19 2011 Registered Card FOM unplugged 8DBRA mismatch FOM FOM Quad El unplugged Quad El efresh gt gt Upload Configuration LOOP AM3440 A Upload Configuration TFTP Server IP 000 000 000 000 Config File Name i lt lt ESC key ignore and return ENTER key accept change 86 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE Please Input nnn nnn nnn nnn 14 53 05 09 1
68. YS O C Ni mon ajwini 0 Do not use for synchronization 100 6 2 12 Bit Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Error Rate Test This menu is used to do bit error rate testing Press T from the Controller Menu Note that this function is not available for these plug in cards Router ATM Frame Relay Dry Contact FXS FXO E amp M and Magneto For test channel when a channel is set as 1 which means this channel is used to do bit error rate testing There are two options are available full or mapped Note that only E1 and T1 plug in cards support full channel When this option mapped is selected for test channel which means user should set up map first For split mode two options are available 1 Send AIS sending AIS to the other side or 2 OFF no sending AIS For Period if set to 0 means text is permanent Other value will stop the test after time out 2exp15 1 274 Ars Alarm Indication Signal ses Severely Error Second BER Bit Error Rate BER Bit Error Elapsed Second SES x test channel x 64 000 ESR Error Second Ratio ESR Error Second Elapsed Second SES sEsR Severely Error Second Ratio SESR SES Elapsed Second P loopback E1 Devices LOOP AM3440 A BERT Test 09 55 21 06 02 2005 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Test Slot 1 Quad E1 Test Port y CEN Pattern Type 2exp15 1 Split Mode Send AIS Test Channel full User Pattern 0
69. at the ports of different 3E1 card On each AM3440 unit will be a primary path and a secondary path detailed setup procedure is described in the following section Both primary and secondary paths are used to protect either a data or voice interface Below is the detailed list for applicable interface for 3E1 protection Data Interface E1 T1 Mini Quad E1 E1 T1 ATM Frame Relay Router FOM TS DTE G shdsl dry contact C37 94 RS232 TDMoE Voice Interface E amp M FXS FXO Magneto QE amp M QFXS QFXO Note 1 For DSO SNCP setup the 3E1 card is only applicable on AM3440 unit version J CHAJ and controller software version 8 02 01 and up Note 2 A maximum of ninety three DS0 SNCP rings can be set in AM3440 A chassis 31 DS0x3 The illustration below is a sample application of a DSO SNCP ring and also the physical topology that corresponds to the setup procedure in the next section 182 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup Interconnected Unit Slot C Protected Interface Voice or Data Slot 7 Slot 8 3E1 Port 2 E em Device A Primary Secondary Slot 2 Device C lintermediate Unit Slot 3 3E1 Device B 3E1 Port 1 Port 1 Slot 2 Protected Interface Slot 1 Voice or Data od Slot C Secondary Interconnected Unit Figure 13 1 Sample Application for 3E1 DS0 SNCP
70. braided strap and bus bars must be bought to a bright finish and coated with anti oxidant before connections are made Chapter 2 Installation 2 3 2 Electrical Installation Guide The application drawing of DC power with grounding and without grounding are shown below Note When the user uses DC power without grounding 77 noise problems and E1 errors may occur FAN TRAY TANTA 7 D z o IDO DIO o 2 o o 00000 00000 O00 O00 000 000 ree mom Emm GI E e o 000 o 10000 of o 00 ol o DD p m Di O o O o 2 2 e Y Ug o o p o o p Do Doo 0 Do O Do o d0 i 2 o ll o ll o ol o ol EW E1 Din D E O O o 00000 00000 000 000 000 0000 00000 00000 000 000 O00 0000 D0 00000 O00 O00 O00 0000 o o 1 48 Vdc A na V dr Foy Ar V sg 2 Ea o e Roe maven Tn 2 48 Vdc Gnd C ES Power Module Power Modus V gt V o wy eam o ABIRE EE 3 48 Vdc GND ES v 19 v 19 V o POWER POWER V i d o Note 12FXS FXO 24FXS FXO 8EM 12 MAG can not use 448 Vdc 2 means short Figure 2 2 DC Power Without Grounding Application 17 Chapter 2 Installation For Dual CTRL protection
71. controller conference tri e1 tri t1 tdmoe 8DBRA sdte x21 a v36 a rs422 a eia530 rs449 a unknown Plug in card Type Description 1 channel E1 1 channel T1 8 channel RS232 with X 50 subrate 8 LAN port 64 WAN port Router B 6 channel V 35 5 channel RS232 with X 50 subrate 6 channel U 10 channel U 3 channel MDSL 1 channel and 4 channel low speed optical C37 94 8 channel 2W 4W E amp M 12 channel and 24 channel FXS 32 WAN port Router 12 channel and 24 channel FXO 1 channel E1 ATM Frame Relay 1 channel T1 ATM Frame Relay 12 channel Magneto 8 channel OCU DP 4 channel E1 4 channel T1 3 channel MDSL A 6 channel V 35 A 4 channel G SHDSL 1 pair w o line power 2 channel G SHDSL 2 pairs w o line power 8 channel G 703 card at 64 Kbps data rate Mini Quad E1 8 channel Dry Contact I O Fiber optical interface 64 WAN port Router A Controller Conference card 3 channel E1 3 channel T1 future option TDMoE 8 channel Data Bridge Card Single port DTE for 4200 6 channel X 21 A 6 channel V 36 A 6 channel RS422 A 6 channel ElA530 A RS449 A Unknown plug in card type 162 Chapter 10 Appendix D Loop AM 3440 A Alarm Trap Information 10 3 ccAlarmSlot Slot index Number Slot Number 1 Slot A 2 Slot B 3 Slot C 4 Slot D 5 Slot 1 6 Slot 2 7 Slot 3 8 Slot 4 9 Slot 5 10 Slot 6 11 Slot 7 12 Slot 8 13 Slot 9 14 Slot 10 15 Slot 11 16 Slot 12 10 4 ccAlarmPort Port index Number Port N
72. cursor at Clock Mode item and TAB key to choose SSM option Note that the SSM clock mode is only available for Quad E1 plug in card and mini Quad E1 plug in card LOOP AM3440 A System Setup SYSTEM 09 39 08 08 18 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS System Time Date 09 39 08 08 18 2010 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A Network NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer LAN ON 010 003 023 010 255 255 000 000 Ethernet WAN OFF 020 001 001 002 255 255 000 000 HDLC 00000001 Gateway Interface LAN Gateway IPAddr 000 000 000 000 nband Uses Slot D Note Slot D port 4 can t use unframe mode CONSOLE port Baud Rate 38400 Data Length o 8 Bits Stop Bit se LS Bact Parity NONE XON_XOFF XOFF TSI map Clock TSI Functi n 1 1 Bidirection Clock Mode 2 SSM dle Signalling 1010 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Press ESC key from the above screen Then press Y to confirm the new setting or N to abort LOOP AM3440 A System Setup SYSTEM 09 39 08 08 18 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS System Time Date 09 39 08 08 18 2010 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A Network NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer LAN ON 010 003 023 010 255 255 000 000 Ethernet WAN OFF 020 001 001 002 255 255 000 000 HDLC 00000001 Gateway Interface LAN Gateway IPAddr 000 000 000 000 nband Uses Slot D Note Slot D port 4 can t use unframe mode CONSOL
73. d 22 d 6 d 22 d d v sd 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d 8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d 9 d 25 d 9 d 25 d Source 0d 31 10 26 ud 104 zc dg 26 d Slot i 3 1d 27 d 1d 27 d Port E B 2d 28 d 2 d 28 d Tros 0 3d 29 d 3d 29 d 4d 30 d 4d 30 d Confirm Yes 5d ed 6 5d 31 d 191 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup Then go back to the previous layer and select D Select a New TSI Map for bypass activation LOOP AM3440 A System Setup ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS New map 15 01 22 11 15 2010 Last activated TSI Map MAP 1 Change to TSI Map TSI Map Mapl Map2 Map3 Map4 lt lt Press ESC to return to previous menu gt gt switch DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE MAP 1 start hr min 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Use MAP1 only for DSO ANCP application On the screen of Select a New TSI map select Map 1 for TSI map Note For DS0 SNCP setup the map number should always be Map 1 default configuration 192 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup 3 Diagnosis To diagnose the DSO SNCP rings access DS0 SNCP Setup through the command path main menu gt S System Setup gt K DSO SNCP Setup Select Status for Action and press ENTER LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Setup 16 15 14 10 15 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS DSO SNCP ENABLE Using Map MAP 1 Action Status lt lt ESC key ignore and return ENTER key accept change
74. dB at O dBmO0 input Max 65 dBm0p Side A exchange side and Side B carrier side setup by side switch 2 wire and 4 wire programmable Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 and Type 5 Transmit only programmable Full compatibility with V 90 modems 7 Chapter 1 Product Description All in band signaling tones are carried transparently by the digitizing process Customer is responsible for in band signaling compatibility between a telephone and a switch or between a PBX and a switch Voice Card 12 MAG Magneto Connector Alarm Conditioning Encoding Impedance Longitudinal Conversion Loss Gain Adjustment Signal Distortion Frequency Response Idle Channel Noise Min Detectable Ringing Voltage Ringing Detectable Across Ringing Generation Ringing Send Across Signaling Signaling Bit A B C D Twelve RJ11 CGA busy after 2 5 seconds of LOS LOF A law or u law user selectable together for all Balanced 600 or magneto telephone impedance match gt 46dB 21 to 10 dB 0 1dB step transmit 8 receive gt 25dB with 1004 Hz OdBm input 0 25 to 1 dB from 300 to 3400 Hz coincide with ITU T G 712 Max 65 dBmOp 16 Vrms L1 and L2 Tip and Ring L1 and GND Tip and GND Voltage 76 Vrms sine wave Frequency 20Hz with optional choices of 16 25 50 Hz Cadence 1 Normal Ring after crank 2 PLAR ON Single Ring Type ring for 2 sec and stop or ring for 4 sec and stop Continuous Ring Type 1 sec on 2 sec
75. data or voice mode d v for the target Also select the desired slot port and starting timeslot number T S for the mapping source After setup select Yes for confirmation LOOP AM3440 A Sy ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB RO MAP NO MAP 1 Target Slot 2 Port Pl TS 01 T S 4 01 Clear No d v d Source Slot 3 Port Pl ToS 01 Confirm Yes Target 3E1 N PO TS D SL PO TS PO stem Setup LL OPTIONS ON CAS TS D SL PO 20 d zu 22 d 23 d 24 d 25g 26 d 27 d 28 d 29 d 30 d 31 d MAP 18 33 28 11 18 2010 Source 3E1 NON CAS TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS l eds 2 JT 17 d 2d 18 d 3d 19 d 4d 20 d 2o 21 d 6 d 22 d 7 d 23 d 8 d 24 d 9 d 25 d 0 d 26 d ld 27 d 2d 28 d 3d 29 d 4d 30 d 5 d 31 d 190 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup To create another DS0 SNCP circuit on timeslot 10 go over the same procedure again and set T S to 10 Then select Yes to confirm LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 18 33 28 11 18 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target 3E1 NON CAS Source 3E1 NON CAS Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS SOB be COME C SS Es DE gt SSS SS Port BL b dou Gode A 7 d Y A ido c2 Roo 14 d T5 10 Zo 8 d zd 18 d 3d 9 d 3d 19 d 4d 20 d 4d 20 d T S 4 01 5d 21 d 5d 21 d Clear No 6
76. following screen appears SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 Unit Loopback and Test 18 25 39 037 017 2001 ARROW EYS CURSOR MOVE ENTER KEY ITEM SELECT TAB NEXT PREV UNIT DTE Port 1 TEST MENU DTE Loopback OFF TO DTE TO DS1 Send V 54 Activate Code to Far End DTE Send V 54 Deactivate Code to Far End DTE Send BERT OFF ON lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Note Pattern type of Bert is 2 15 1 106 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 3 6 Alarm Setup To set up the alarm configuration press M The following screen is displayed SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 Alarm Setup 18 35 43 03 01 2001 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Port Alarm Relay Unit 9 1 DISABLE DISABLE Unit 9 2 DISABLE DISABLE Unit 9 3 DISABLE DISABLE Unit 9 4 DISABLE DISABLE Unit 9 5 DISABLE DISABLE Unit 9 6 DISABLE DISABLE 6 3 7 Upgrade Firmware To set up the alarm configuration press G The following screen is displayed lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu or save setup gt gt OOP AM3440 A Download Firmware 16 02 46 07 14 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE Please Input nnn nnn nnn nnn BACKSPACE to edit Bank 1 Firmware Ver V2 01 01 03 03 2006 Good Bank 2 Firmware Ver V2 01 01 03 03 2006 Good Working Firmware Bank 1 TFTP Server IP 192 168 1 1 Firmware File Name gt dsl ft tum lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 107
77. following screen will show To view the port status for the ATM FR T1 interface by selecting ATM status type The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk NOTE When Frame Relay is selected ATM Status will be hidden SLOT D ATM FR T1 Port Status gt gt Select ATM Status Type T1 El Status FR Status 17 24 32 07 21 2002 ATM Status 6 4 6 1 T1 E1 Status SLOT D ATM FR T1 2 LINE LOS NO LOF NO RCV AIS NO RCV YEL NO XMT AIS NO XMT YEL NO BPV ERROR COUNT 0 ES ERROR COUNT 0 ss TEST PATTERN TRANSMITTED OFF NEAR END LOOPBACK OFF lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu Port Status SPACE key to refresh gt gt 17 24 37 07 21 2002 118 Chapter 6 6 4 6 2 Frame Relay Status Terminal Operation FR to ATM SLOT D ATM FR T1 Port Frame Relay Status 17 24 42 07 21 2002 CH Link CH Link 1 Up lich nactive 2 nactive 18 nactive 3 nactive 1 9 nactive 4 nactive 20 nactive 5 nactive 21 nactive 6 nactive 22 nactive 7 nactive 23 nactive 8 nactive 24 nactive 9 nactive 25 nactive 0 nactive 26 nactive I nactive 27 nactive 2 nactive 28 nactive 3 nactive 29 nactive 4 nactive 30 nactive 5 nactive 31 nactive 6 nactive lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt FR to FR SLOT D ATM FR T1 CH Link CH T1 El Up 16 1 Down 17 2 nactive 18 3 n
78. gt gt The following screen will show up The index shows the currently built DS0 SNCP circuit and their detailed information You can use the commands listed at the bottom of the screen to make diagnosis on each DSO SNCP circuit LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Information 16 19 38 10 15 2010 DSO SNCP ENABLE Total DSO SNCP 2 Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS 1 D 01 W 7 de 01 8 1 01 D Non revertible 2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 Lo 10 D Non revertible ESC return SPACE next page D delete F force switch M change mode L lock on working P lock on primary S lock on secondary U unlock 193 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup e ESC Return to the previous page e SPACE Go to the next page for more DSO SNCP information e Delete Delete a DSO SNCP ring from the index Press D on the screen of DSO SNCP information A prompt message will ask you to choose the SNCP circuit you would like to delete If you want to delete one circuit key in the circuit s index number in both from and to columns as the example below Then press Enter and select Yes for confirm to do LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Information 16 19 38 10 15 2010 DS0 SNCP ENABLE Total DSO SNCP 2 Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS 1 D 01 E 1 01 8 1 01 D Non revertible 2 C 01 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non revertible The circuit you choose to delete will be cleared fr
79. in PC Download the firmware file xxxxxx run Copy Firmware to redundant board Do warm reset in primary controller board Firmware download for the primary controller board procedure complete Do reset in redundant board Firmware download for the redundant controller board procedure complete Note The name of the run code file name will be provided by Loop and will vary 88 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation The following step by step procedure uses dual controller device as example Note The Dual controller procedure includes the Single controller procedure Download Firmware File with dual controller cards 1 Command Path Controller Menu gt W Firmware Transfer gt A Download Mainboard Firmware 2 When the Download Firmware screen appears key in the TFTP Server IP number and Firmware File Name xxxxxx run this example use v8 19 01 run Then press Enter to start process the download The screen shown below is Firmware Downloading LOOP AM3440 A Download Firmware 10 38 01 12 13 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE BACKSPACE to edit ESC to abort Firmware 1 Version V8 17 03 07 20 2011 Firmware 2 Version V8 18 02 09 19 2011 Current Firmware Bank 2 Next Boot Firmware 2 TFTP Server IP E Firmware File Name E 10 40 10 12 13 11 Downloading firmware Received 471 Blocks 10 40 13 12 13 11 Received 241297 bytes 10 40 13 12 13 11 Checksum ok 10 40 13 12 13 11 Write firmware file to flash 57 lt lt E
80. io o ESSE AT moc ramme DE moe E DO e me o a G ue me EE DO o a cs e a S poooro0000 The illustration below is the Link Backup Function Schema Link Backup Schema 1 1 E Active Tributary n pe Backup A ae ee DSO Cross Connect Tributary Active Backup 1 1 i e Active Tributary meee a a Backup meme DSO Cross Connect Tributary Active Backup 146 7 2 7 3 Chapter 7 Appendix A Link Backup Function Physical Requirement The physical configuration of a Link Backup Function should consist of one AM3440 unit and at least 2 E1 T1 cards for mini slot or at least 2 FOM cards FOM card for mini slot or 1FOMA for single slot Setup Procedure To configure the Link Backup Function in the follow procedure 1 Same configure on both link backup cards 2 Configure Link Backup Function 3 Configure the TSI Map see TSI Map setup in chapter 6 Configure Link Backup Function Command Path Controller Menu S System Setup G Link Backup Function Description This function is to setup the 1 1 or 1 1 protection for single E1 T1 FOM cards in mini slots and 1FOMA cards in single slot 1 From the System Setup Backup screen choose to activ
81. jitter margin presence of bridge taps and mis optioned network interface These four patterns are framed pattern with proper DS1 frame pattern as described in the following paragraph 4 6 Verifying Loop AM Operations The purpose of this section is not to help the user determine where a possible fault in the network may lie For this the user needs to know the exact geometry of the network Then standard network trouble shooting procedures should be followed which involve sectionalizing the network and performing loopback tests on pieces of the network The purpose here is to help the user determine whether the AM3440 equipment is at fault after tests have pointed a suspicious finger at this equipment The procedures outlined here depend on test equipment and other equipment the user may have on hand The organization of these procedures starts from the simple to the complex The procedure ends when a definitive conclusion is made that the AM3440 equipment is at fault To verify that the AM3440 equipment is not at fault specialized equipment such as a BERT bit error rate test set is needed 43 Chapter 4 Maintenance 4 6 1 Quick Test 4 6 1 1 LCD Display LCD is currently available 4 6 1 2 Independent Test Remove all line and interface connections to AM3440 Remove power After a few seconds re apply power Observe the power AMp self test sequence If this fails then Loop AM has failed See if the LEDs show any abnormal display
82. of the 4 ports of a Quad E1 T1 interface card or a FOM interface can be configured either unframed or framed provision for inband management imposes limitation as follows when one of these is selected for inband management the Port 4 in that Slot D or 12 must be configured to framed For further information of inband management please refer to Chapter 8 Appendix B Inband Management The RTA RTB 4GH and TDMoE card supports up to 32 timeslots in normal condition Due to the timeslot limitation a 64K timeslot is reserved in the port 4 of Slot D and Slot 12 Therefore users can only set up to 31 timeslots for these cards when they are plugged in either Slot D or Slot 12 LOOP AM3440 A System Setup SYSTEM 18228237 08 03 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE Please Input hh mm ss mm dd yyyy BACKSPACE to edit System Time Date 18 28 38 08 03 2011 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A Network NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer LAN ON 010 003 023 095 255 255 000 000 Ethernet WAN OFF 010 004 001 001 255 255 255 000 HDLC 00000001 Gateway Interface LAN Gateway IPAddr 000 000 000 000 nband Uses Slot D CONSOLE port Baud Rate 9600 Data Length a S Bits Stop Bit l Bit Parity NONE XON XOFF OXOFFE TSI map Clock TSI Function 1 1 Bidirection Clock Mode Normal dle Signalling 1010 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Note NI Network Interface EN Enable DIS Disable
83. on the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether key in the first index number in the from column and the last index number in the to column e Lock on Secondary Lock the data path on the secondary timeslot Press S from the screen of DSO SNCP information A prompt message will ask you to select the SNCP circuit which you would like to lock the secondary timeslot as the working timeslot Key in the circuit s index number and press Enter Then select Yes for Confirm to do LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Information 16 19 38 10 15 2010 DS0 SNCP ENABLE Total DSO SNCP 2 Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS 01 01 01 10 D Non revertible D Non revertible 199 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup The working timeslot will then be locked on the secondary slot and port and will not switch automatically The locked circuit will also change its mode to lock Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS 1 D 01 7 1 01 W 8 1 01 D Lock 2 C 01 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non revertible To activate Lock on Primary on the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether key in the first index number in the from column and the last index number in the to column Unlock Unlock the locked timeslot 200 4 Bit Error Rate Test Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup
84. redundant CPU Active OA Nomaaa 4 Normal Redundant CPU board is synchronizing to primary CPU board 3 The synchronization is done Redundant version is different with Primary Red 3 Off NOTE Active led is used to identify primary CPU If the color of Active led is flashing green then this CPU is primary Off Not existed SYNC TEST Green DS1 line frame in sync Flash Green DS1 line is under testing or m Normal EC E Loss of Frame LOF or Loss of Signal LOS CE Normal Amber Receive remote alarm indication from DS1 Flashing Amber line Receive alarm indication signal from DS1 line por Nosignalorport not equipped Normal 4E1 T1 interface in sync Green In master mode as protection function is enable 4 LEDs Red Alarm 4E1 T1 interface is unsync Flashing Red e RAI F MER nat WE Flashing Green slowly n slave mode as protection Tunction IS enable RAI AIS cad Flashing Green Transmit Receive data present V 35 V 36 Green Normal ElA530 Flashing Green regularly Loopback Test X 21 V 11 RED Alarm E1 T1 line frame in sync E1 T1 line is under testing Loss of Frame LOF or Loss of Signal LOS Receive yellow alarm from E1 T1 line Receive alarm indication signal AIS from E1 T1 line Green Flash Green Red Amber Flashing Amber 39 Chapter 3 Operation 3 5 Telnet Connectivity To manage the system from internet Loop AM controller offers Telnet connect
85. result LOOP AM3440 A Init a New Card 18 53 43 08 01 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Slot Model State Slot Model State FE1 5 FEL 6 7 FOM mismatch 8 9 Quad El 10 Quad El BWNHRUAW DPD 12 This command will clear the related TSI and init the unit with default Select Slot D Please wait at least 10 seconds for initialize procedure lt lt ESC key ignore and return ENTER key accept change gt gt 71 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 7 10 Clear Empty Slot Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt J Clear Empty Slot This function is to clear the empty slot The sample below shows to select D than press enter to accept LOOP AM3440 A Clear Empty Slot 19 02 22 08 01 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Slot Registered Model State Slot Registered Model State A FE1 5 FE1 6 F FE1 unplugged 8 9 Quad El 10 Quad El 11 Quad El unplugged 12 BwWNHR OO WD This command will clear the related TSI and clear the slot with ZERO Select Slot D lt lt ESC key ignore and return ENTER key accept change gt gt The setting is completed You can move to another slot if any LOOP AM3440 A Clear Empty Slot 19 02 22 08 01 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Slot Registered Model State Slot Registered Model State A FE1 5 FE1 6 FE1 8 Quad El 10 Quad El 11 Quad El unplugged BwWNHr OO WD o This command will cle
86. the AM3440 9 2 1 Step by Step Quad E1 Plug in card Circuit Protection Setup The sample screens below provide step by step instructions for setting up Quad E1 Circuit Protection In our sample setup we installed Quad E1 cards in slot 9 and slot 10 The card in slot 9 will be working slot and slot 10 will be standing by Go to Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt Q QDS1 1 1 Protection select Setup and press Enter The Setup menu is to setup the protection modes for each protection pair and ports LOOP AM3440 A QDS1 1 1 Protection 17 42 06 08 02 2011 gt gt Select Setup Status On the Setup Screen there are four selection for the user to setup such as disable circuit line non revertive line revertive 1 1 non revertive and 1 1 revertive The sample below is to setup the port 1 of slot 9 10 as circuit protection It means Slot 9 port 1 is protection working port and slot 10 port 1 as backup in Circuit mode LOOP AM3440 A QDS1 1 1 Protection 16 57 54 08 02 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Protect Pair Master Backup Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Slot A B FEI FEL 2 222 fesse esse es reno Slot C D FOM 0 nooo Heese eee eee c2 2 2 2 Slot 1 2 QuadE1 Slot 3 4 DI Eg Slot 5 6 9 222 2c2ceceeen esccconceco cececeeee ee Slot 7 8
87. the system will prompt the following message shown in the bottom line Enter Y to confirm the setting or N to abort LOOP AM3440 A Store Retrieve Configuration l93092517 03 701 20201 gt gt Select STORE RETRIEVE Store Current Configuration Y N Press Y from the above screen then enter password in the following screen The default password is LOOP LOOP AM3440 A Store Retrieve Configuration 16 43 26 02 20 2004 gt gt Select STORE RETRIEVE gt gt Enter password XXXX Then press ENTER from the above screen the configuration is saved LOOP AM3440 A Store Retrieve Configuration 16 43 26 02 20 2004 gt gt Select STORE RETRIEVE gt gt Saving 93 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Retrieve Configuration Use arrow keys to move the cursor at RETRIEVE which will be highlighted by an asterisk LOOP AM3440 A Store Retrieve Configuration 19 09 25 10103 017 2001 so Select 7 STORE RETRIEVE Press ENTER from the above screen Then press Y to retrieve last stored configuration or N to abort it LOOP AM3440 A Store Retrieve Configuration gt gt Select STORE RETRIEVE gt gt Retrieve Last Stored Configuration 2 Y N 16 45 31 02 20 2004 Press Y from the above screen then enter password in the following screen The default password is LOOP LOOP AM3440 A St
88. to confirm it SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port Menu Version SW S1 CO 10 20 2004 DISPLAY SETUP 1 Unit 1 Hour Perf Report L gt U 2 gt Unit 24 Hour Perf Report S gt U A gt Unit Line Availability K gt U C gt Unit Configuration M gt U E gt Unit Status Xo Y H gt Unit Alarm History Ibex Q gt Unit Alarm Queue LOG MISC U gt Choose Other Slot Y cx Ug P Choose Port Zi mU F Log Off SETUP MISC Menu O gt Log On SETUP MISC Menu E gt Return to Controller Main Menu Reset are you sure Y N nit nit nit nit nit nit nit nu 10 28 12 10 27 2004 Loopback Setup System Setup Clear Performance Data Alarm Setup Clear Alarm Queue amp History Upgrade Firmware Load Default Config Reset 145 Chapter 7 Appendix A Link Backup Function 7 Appendix A Link Backup Function 7 1 Introduction The Link Backup Function of AM3440 only applies to single E1 T1 FOM in mini slot A B C and D and 1FOMA in single slot 1 to 12 The Link backup function supports 1 1 and 1 1 protection This occurs when the system is set up so that a backup line or lines in the case of 1 n will be switched into service if the working line fails In such a case it must be switched in at each end of the line POWER E1 T1 A E1 T1 B CPU 1 CPU 2 1 2 e Y VD 0 a a S S C DIEJEIEJEJEJIEIEIEIEIE S 1FOMA 1FOMA EA EE moc vrs cm Y nea Y
89. useful life please dispose of it at appropriate collection points provided in your country Une fois le produit en fin devie veuillez le d poser dans un point de recyclage appropri Para preservar el medio ambiente al final dela vida til de su producto depositelo en los laguares destinado aello de acuerdo con la legislaci n vigente No final de vida til do producto por favor coloque no ponto de recolha apropriado Onde tutelare l ambiente non buttate l apparecchio trai i normali rifiuti al termine della sua vita utile ma portatelo presso i punti di raccolta specifici per questi rifiuti previsti dalla normativa vigente Wij raden u aan het apparant aan het einde van zijn nuttige levensduur niet bij hey gewone huisafval te deponeren maar op de dearvoor bestemde adressen Nar produktet er udtjent bor det bertskaffes via de sae rlige indsamlingssteder i landet Ved slutten av produktets levetid b r det avhendes p en kommunal milj stasjon eller leveres til en elektroforhandler Lamna vanligen in produkten p l mplig atervinningsstation nar den ar f rbrukad H vit tuote kaytdian p ttyess viem ll se asianmukaiseen kerayspisteeseen Gdy produkt nie nadaje sie juz do dalszego uzytku nalezy zostawic go w jednym ze specjalnych punkt w zajmujacych sie zbi rka zuzytych produckt w w wybranych miejscach na terenie kraju Po skon en jeho ivotnosti odlo te pros m v robek na p islu n m sb rn m m s
90. which consists of a Loop AM3440 A device equipped with three Quad E1 cards or alternatively three Mini quad E1 cards or three E1 FOM Fiber Optical Module cards and a single Router card 3 VT 100 Each AM3440 A can be set up individually using a VT 100 monitor 4 Clocks The clocks must be set up on each of the AM3440 units If you have no SSM source at the MASTER unit set the clock for this unit at NORMAL SLAVE units must have their clock set at SSM LOOP AM3440 A System Setup CLOCK Normal Mode 15 16 51 03 24 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Master Clk Source INTERNAL Second Clk Source INTERNAL Current Clock MASTER CLK Clk Recover Mode MANUAL Clock Status NORMAL Ext Clock Type gt El lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt The clocks on the SLAVE units will be set up as shown in the screen below LOOP AM3440 A System Setup CLOCK SSM Mode 15 19 39 03 24 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS First Clock Source SLOT 1 P1 Second Clock Source SLOT 1 P2 Third Clock Source NONE Current Clock FIRST CLK Clock Status NORMAL lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 171 Chapter 11 Appendix E Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring 5 FDL Facilities Data Link On the Port System Setup screen set the FDL must be set at SSM for all ports in the ring ie Slave unit ports and Master unit ports
91. 0 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 1st Nearest 15 Min Tohaar ea ED Nearest 15 Min DESSE si o O o sd ues 3rd Nearest 15 Min ALAS as es ES Nearest 15 Min le ee SS ye eee ve o a 2nd 4th Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval 0 SAS SEFS SES SBES lt lt TAB key to show Performance Report gt gt SES CSS SLOFC Current 24 Hour pec EE Current 24 Hour E lt lt TAB key to show Performance Report gt gt lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt SLOT D ATM FR T1 Port 1 Hour Perf Report 17 18 20 07 21 2002 LINE Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 321 seconds ES UAS BES SES CSS LOFC Current 15 Min Interval 0 0 0 0 0 0 ist Nearest Ll5 Min Interval p s5450 Esso CREARA CIA ASS Secs 2nd Nearest l5 Mimn Interval i 2 mudas CSS cmcmewec meme AS 3rd Nearest 15 Min Interval 4th Nearest 15 Min Interval Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval O0 ES UAS BES SES CSS LOFC Current 24 Hour Interval a RSE Seon pesos CHERS lt lt TAB key to show Statistics Report gt gt lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt SLOT D ATM FR T1 Port l Hour Stat Report 172182223 0272172002 LINE Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 321 seconds AS SEFS SES SBES SSES CSS
92. 000 Community Name public Trap IP 5 000 000 000 000 Community Name public Trap System IP lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 152 Chapter 8 Appendix B Inband Management Back to the Controller Setup menu and press C to access the System Setup MAP screen Use arrow keys and the TAB key to set up the HDLC TSI map You must select a time slot to use for inband management In the example below we decided to map Time Slot 1 of Port A to Time Slot 1 of the HDLC Port for this purpose When you have completed your TSI map press ESC to return to the Controller Setup menu Then press D from that menu to activate the new map LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 14 16 07 09 09 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target El NON CAS Source In Band Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Slot A mi ESL DC ECL LLLA SSS OS SSS SS SSS Port 1 d IB 1 17 d ld A 1 Tz OT 2 d 18 d 3 19d 4 d 20 d Dist 3 01 5 d 21 d Clear No 6 d 22 d d v id 7 d 23 d 8 d 24 d Gm 25 10 Source 10 d 26 d Slot y LB 11 d 27 d Port 12 3 28 d SA 1 13 d 28 d 14 d 30 d Confirm Yes 15 d SL dd Le a lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt 153 Chapter 9 Appendix C QDS1 1 1 Protection 9 Appendix C QDS1 1 1 Protection 9 1 Introduction The QDS1 1 1 protection function onl
93. 0000000 Test Enable ENABLE Test Channel 01111111111111111111111111111111 31 channels Pattern 2exp15 1 UNSYNC Elapsed Second 13 Bit Error fO BER s 140 Error Seconds O0 ESR 1440 SES 13 SESR 1 0 lt lt ESC KEY EXIT LEFT ARROW RESET ERROR RIGHT ARROW INJECT AN ERROR gt gt 101 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 13 Alarm Cut Off Press A to show the alarm cut off screen gt gt Use TAB key to select unit and ENTER key to clear alarm ALL SLOTs gt gt Clear alarm queue of ALL SLOTs are you sure Y N gt gt Cut off alarm are you sure Y N 6 2 14 Clear Alarm Queue Press X to show the clear alarm queue screen gt gt Clear Alarms Y N 6 2 15 Return to Default Press Y to show the return to default screen gt gt Return to default are you sure Y N 6 2 16 Controller Reset Press Z to show the system reset screen gt gt Select Redundant Primary Both Reset are you sure Y N 102 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 3 DTE V 35 Sub Menu Under the Controller Menu press U to choose a slot for the DTE V 35 port Then the following Port Menu of DTE V 35 port will show SLOT 7 DTE PORT 1 Port Menu 10 40 07 07 06 2006 Version SW V2 01 02 04 27 2006 DISPLAY SETUP C gt DTE Configuration S gt System Setup DTE Status L Loopback Test H Alarm Histo
94. 03 04 2 YES HDLC 3 YES FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 4 YES HDLC 5 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 6 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 T NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 8 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 9 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 10 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 11 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 12 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 13 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 14 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 15 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 16 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Connection Table Setup FR to FR Select the CONN TAB item on the Port System Setup menu Use this management setup to link the connection table to that of the Frame Relay network The channel number can be 1 to 31 All the numerical entries must be coordinated with the Frame Relay network The meanings of the table columns are as follows Column Heading Options Meaning Logical channel number Data Link Connection Identifier within the egress E1 T1 port Committed Information Rate Committed Burst Size Excess Burst Size 132 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation DLCI DLCI in egress E1 T1 port CIR Be Information rate committed on E1 T1 side _ Actual allocated bandwidth SLOT D ATM FR El Port Connection Table Setup 10 20 01 09 13 2002 Please Input 1 10 BACKSPACE to edit CH DLCI lt gt DLCI CIR Bc Be index 4 04 HDLC 019 0064 0064 0000
95. 096 31OSNOO Grounding Screw QDODODNDN 000000000 000000 DO CODO QOO 0 OQ DO DO DUO LO LO LOC D LOL OE D DO LO LO LO LO ODOTODDODODOTOODODODCOCUDOTODOCOO DOLO OO DODO CD DO DOC DUC TO DO DO DO OD 0 000000 DDOODOODODOQQOD NODORODOQQODOOTCDOQ DO DOQOQO LO OO OQ OC OC D CULO OO DO DO RO DD DD DO 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 DOCOCOLLOCIUODODO QOLOLO 3 Y 0000000900000 TT TETE TE Ema SOVJH31NI 091 Main Access DCS Mux Shelf Rear Side o o o o o o o o o o o o to S CPU Figure 2 3 Panel Views Main Shelf and CPU 18 Chapter 2 Installation OTE When these plug in cards two CPU cards four mini Quad E1 plug in cards ten G shdsl plug in cards and one 100W UM5813 power module are plugged into an AM3440 one more 100W UM5813 power module should be added to plug into the AM3440 48V 48V 8A 8A Tr H O zr H V o TV V O V POWER POWER 48 Vdc 36 to 75 Vdc 48 Vdc 36 to 75 Vdc 100W 150W Power Module Power Module 24 V 47 125V 10A 5A nr H O tr dO V 0 V Oo V o V POWER POWER 24 Vdc 18 to 36 Vdc
96. 1 Site Selection tenet ra em uen cen et acte rtm taie tdv o ad 15 2 2 Mechanical Installation 5 1 ne e dani edi A E 15 2 3 Electrical Installation Fb ee a das ott t e pate dir teuer da 15 2 3 1 Chassis Grounding vee 5 iio ene UHR e eR Ere Re ee te deeds 16 2 3 2 Electrical Installation Gulde cc eee en ehe ete aN Adee eee al 17 2 3 3 Fan Tray Settlmgaisa denen eret A GIU LHP aida 20 2 3 4 Alarm Relay nua aceti eder p eden eu 22 2 3 5 Fuso Relay idee oh cene ep db aie det roe eden dores 23 2 3 6 Jumper Location for Mini Quad El card sssssssssssssseeeenem eren 23 2 3 7 Eine Power ODptlon riti eere Ier ist DH Reperitur 24 24 Configuration Setting cene e edd RN Beet e eee tacts 24 2 4 1 Software Configuration Setting erre eene enne 24 2 4 2 Replacement of Plug in card ar eaateneeaa mcr nennen nene eren 24 SACO ETC S 31 3 1 Quick Start for LoopzAM sc oett era ero eder d e ee eM UR Ote it d detis 31 3 1 1 Power OMS m eee ee eH e en fo E dece debe RR estu RA ia 31 3 1 2 Eoad Default 22er eter den de ea atan d esas 31 3 1 3 Using Front Panels turni a n ete Dont na eunt eire dote titan 31 3 1 3 1 Review of Default Settings esssssssssse eee nemen 31 3 1 3 2 Map S tup tic da Ad Dad 31 3 1 3 3 DS a ooo cer d ana errata Les EE ten blend 32 3 1 3 4 Unit Selection Lo rrt etUm e M i 3
97. 1 Slot A Single E1 current map configuration status It indicates Slot A Timeslot TS 5 to 9 mapping to Slot 9 Port 1 Timeslot TS 5 to 9 LOOP AM3440 A System Configuration Map 16 29 05 07 29 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Map Number MAP 1 Slot Number A El PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Port Number NON CAS 1 d 1 d 2 d 18 d 3 8 19 d 4 d 20 d 5 dg 9 1 5 21 d 6 d 9 1 6 22 d Pg 9 1 7 23 d 8 d 9 1 8 24 d 9 d 9 1 9 25 d 10 d 26 d 11 d 27 d 12 d 28 d 13 d 29 d 14 d 30 d 15 d 31 d l6 d lt lt Press ESC to return to previous menu gt gt Another example shows Slot C with no plug in card LOOP AM3440 A System Configuration Map 14 45 22 08 02 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Map Number MAP_1 Slot Number PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Port Number Es gt s lt lt Press ESC to return to previous menu gt gt 51 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 1 4 Current TSI Map Controller Menu gt C System Configuration gt D Current TSI Map The screen of Current TSI Map will show as below The sample screen shows Slot A Single E1 current map configuration status It indicates Slot A Timeslot TS 5 to 9 mapping to Slot 9 Port 1 Timeslot TS 5 to 9 LOOP AM3440 A System Configuration Current Map 16 19 54 10 01 2003 Current Map Slot Numb
98. 125 Vdc 40 to 150 Vdc 150W 100W Power Module Power Module Figure 2 4 Panel Views for 1 2 slot Power Modules Chapter 2 Installation 2 3 3 Fan Tray Setting FAN TRAY POWER X E1 T1 C E1 T1 D CPU 1 cruz 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Ol l ue VLLL 2 00 00 0000000 000 00 00 0000000 00 2000 ol ooo E1 E1 T1 TI o o EVTTA EUT B penen Eu adn ooo 222 Sou E1 E1 T1 T1 000 000 000 000 000 000 oll oll O O o o 1 Oooo O o UUU o O O 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 ol O o O 1000 o uli O 000 000 000 O o O o O 000 000 000 ooo ooo ooo 210 Install a fan tray on the top of a AM3440 to reduce the temperature when the following modules are plugged into the AM3440 at the same time 1 G shdsl plug in card with line power module Important Note The fan power socket in the back of the AM3440 chassis would be activated if it use 48 Vdc power supply In addition the fan power module will not work when it use 24 Vdc power supply Figure 2 5 Front Panel View Fan Tray FAN TRAY FAN TRAY CHS GND B QA ALM V V ALM V V DC48V DC48V Figure 2 6 Rear Panel View Fan Tray 20 Chapter 2 Installation r ON o NN S P N Y NX P
99. 2 3 1 4 USING Termal Tc 32 3 1 5 Configuration ettihgs 22 np otra hate e Cu p Rr E HERO ade EAN UCLA Deed a Ep ce e a nou Red pata dao 32 3 2 System ODeratlOnt 5 tec ptu axo id E Seis ares 33 3 2 1 BET IE T M C PEE 33 3 2 2 Master Glock red o cubren oce eese es aa ALME a 33 3 2 3 A aident te DU T OE DUDEN KI EIE 33 3 2 4 Venu lock a AE ree SR errr erry reer trey cere ere rr 33 3 2 5 Logon Logoff and Password sssssssssssssssssse eene eren en nennen nnne 34 3 3 Alarms and Reports arado ir metto PRU Reise ERE CORSA RAN ista 34 3 3 1 A o E Item cut gates d Di Es aer LU Dre nm V RU Pen LT DIET 34 3 3 2 REPOMS M MEC x TER 37 3 4 EED Operation 5 a A ec er p ees cy etd ede dss 39 3 5 Telnet Connectivity terimi o ED er o e ede c pe e e Ra aaa 40 3 6 Embedded SNMP Agent 5 tala e te a ee ee ie tee eue eh andado erae e cv aue acao da 40 3 7 In Band Management Setup rr nennen rra 41 4 Maintenance Cc 43 4 1 SETE EE 43 4 2 IBI te aoc RD 43 4 3 Near Erid Loopback 5 uit ned pee dees ca cei ei ea edge eae ede 43 4 4 Far End Loopback nne Rec etin ce eco vem been ede ae av eee 43 4 5 Test Pattern ederet eee ee ane ae HP epu dt eee eee eo du RR 43 4 6 Verifying Loop AM Operations ssssssssseee eem nana rra 43 4 6 1 eer 44 4 6 1 1 LED DISplay cias br t att E tiet ce etes ua tete sb irado 44 4 6 1 2 Independent Testis rreri c en teeth em qe riesen edi lae t eut Cebu teu etd 44
100. 20 2002 07 19 2002 07 18 2002 07 17 2002 E lt lt TAB key to show Statistics Report gt gt lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt 16 30 16 07 24 2002 111 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation SLOT D ATM FR El Port 1 Hour Stat Report 16430520 0772472002 LINE Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 33 seconds AS SEFS SES SBES SES SDM CSS Current 15 Min 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 100 00 Lest Nearest X5 cMINm ERA rese eges A A A AS AA A 2nd N rest Lo Min aaa ES AA ARA SA A AS AR Shien se 3rd Nearest 15 Min o a Saas 4th Nearest 1b Min iecore EE A A A A A Rae Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval O0 SAS SEFS SES SBES SSES SDM SCSS Current 24 Hour RAS Manin Se aso niga A A nine AA 07 23 2002 a shore Seo a Sinos SSE e TERR Sek Se pe iS a Pa 07 22 2002 NS SS SRS Sas SI Sia Se SS 07 21 2002 ARS AS SS SSS SSS SSeS SSS eS SSP SSS SSS es SSeS SS 07 20 2002 a E a a a a a a 07 19 2002 Bea SST SS is Ss essas Fedora See ee 07 18 2002 a e RSS eS 07 17 2002 RRS SASS SS SATS SH Sea ge ASS ee SSS meer Sones Sse lt lt TAB key to show Performance Report gt gt lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt 6 4 2 24 Hour Performance Report 6 4 2 1 ATM Frame Relay T1 Press 2 from the port menu the following screen will show To view ATM FR T1 port 24
101. 21 1 1 29 4 and 4 bye user define pattern Dimensions 432 4 x 220 x 223 5 mm WxHxD Power Single Dual 48 Vdc 36 to 75 Vdc 100 Watts max Single Dual 48 Vdc 36 to 75 Vdc 150 Watts max Single Dual 24 Vdc 18 to 36 Vdc 150 Watts max Single Dual 125 Vdc 40 to 150 Vdc 100 Watts max Temperature 0 55 C Humidity 0 9596 RH non condensing Mounting Desk top stackable 19 23 rack mountable Line Power X Available only with DC power for G SHDSL card only Supply Power Max 110 Watts Consumption Certification EN55022 Class A EN50024 FCC Part 15 Class A FCC Part 68 CS 03 IEC60950 UL60950 Compliance ITU G 703 G 704 G 706 6 732 6 736 G 823 G 826 G 711 G 775 0 151 V 11 V 28 V 54 IETF SNMP v 3 RFC2571 2575 13 Chapter 1 Product Description Specifications for Loop VV Y BOX LINE Connector BNC or RJ48C Port Number For Y BOX with BNC connectors 4 line ports For Y BOX with RJ48C connectors 16 line ports Protection For Y BOX with BNC connectors support 2 Quad E1 plug in card 4 active E1 4 standby E1 For Y BOX with RJ48C connectors support 8 Quad E1 plug in cards 16 active E1 16 standby E1 For Y BOX with RJ48C connectors support 8 Quad T1 plug in cards 16 active T1 16 standby T1 Mechanical Height 44 5 mm 1 75 in Width 432 mm 17 in Depth 100 mm 3 9 in Future Option A LINE 12
102. 222222222 22222222222 Slot C D FOM O 0 c 9 c 0 2 Slot 1 2 QuadE1 0 c 2 c 2 c slot 3 4 0 2 2 c c 2 Slot 5 6 is Slot 7 8 Slot 9 10 QuadE1 QuadE1 ForceSwitch NO NO J Slot 11 12 c 2 2 c c 0 2 Protection Working Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Slot A B FEl FEl Slot C D FOM Slot 1 2 QuadE1 Slot 3 4 slot 5 6 Slot 7 8 Slot 9 10 QuadE1 QuadE1 9 1 9 2 9 3 Slot 11 12 lt lt ESC key ignore and return ENTER key accept change gt gt Function Option Default ForceSwitch NO ForceSwitch NO Press Enter to accept change and key in Y to change the configuration Change configuration Y N Note to save please use V command 9 3 Setting up Line Protection Line protection is illustrated in Figure below It does not require the use of a Loop VV Y BOX Quad E1 E1 Line Quad E1 Card Card Quad E1 E1 Line Quad E1 Card Card AM 3440 AM 3440 Figure 9 3 Line Protection for Quad E1 Card 157 Chapter 9 Appendix C QDS1 1 1 Protection 9 3 1 Step by Step Quad E1 Card Line Protection Setup The sample screens below provide step by step instructions for setting up Quad
103. 25 1 12 channel FXS card 219 19 Total 78 Watts Condition 3 for G SHDSL with line power plug in card only The fan try is required for all G SHDSL cards with line power plug in cards due to higher heat density dissipation in the slot 208
104. 3 CRC ON RAI ON AIS FRAMED CAS 0EE SIGNALLING TRANS CGA NORM OOS BUSY FDL OFF Sa_bit Sal IDLE D5 Protected DISABLE Master SRR INTF 120 Ohm lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Note When user does Inband setup slot D port 4 cannot do unframed mode setup 6 5 10 Unit Clear Performance Data Press K from Port Menu to clear performance data the screen will show as below Press Y or N to confirm the commend SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port Menu 10 26 45 10 27 2004 Version SW S1 C0 10 20 2004 DISPLAY SETUP 1 gt Unit 1 Hour Perf Report L gt Unit Loopback Setup 2 gt Unit 24 Hour Perf Report S gt Unit System Setup A gt Unit Line Availability K gt Unit Clear Performance Data C gt Unit Configuration M Unit Alarm Setup I gt gt Unit Status X gt Unit Clear Alarm Queue History H Unit Alarm History D Unit Upgrade Firmware Q gt Unit Alarm Queue LOG MISC U gt Choose Other Slot Y Unit Load Default Config P Choose Port Z Unit Reset F gt Log Off SETUP MISC Menu O gt Log On SETUP MISC Menu E Return to Controller Main Menu gt Clear performance data are you sure Y N 142 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 5 11 Unit Alarm Setup To do alarm setup press M from Port Menu then the following screen will show up SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port Alar
105. 3 Traffic PPB per G 823 Synchronous Standard Compliance IETF TDMoIP RFC5087 SAToP RFC4553 CESoPSN RFC5086 IEEE 802 1q 802 1p 802 1d 802 3 802 3u 802 3x 802 3z 802 1s 802 1w 12 Clock Source Chapter 1 Product Description Internal Line Interface External E1 T1 2048 KHz Alarm Relay Alarm Relay max current 1A for 24VDC 0 625A for 48VDC Fuse alarm and performance alarm System Configuration Parameters Active Configuration Stored Configuration and Default Configuration Stored in Non volatile Memory Management Console Ethernet Inband Management Ethernet LCD Performance Monitor Performance Registers Separate Registers Performance Reports Alarm Queue Threshold Diagnostics Loopback Test Pattern Physical Electrical Electrical RS232 Connector DB9 female User Interface Menu driven VT 100 1 port Connector RJ45 10 100 Base T SNMPv1 v3 Telnet SSH Inband 64 Kbps support HDLC PPP Optional Last 24 hours performance in 15 minute intervals and last 7 days in 24 hour summaries Network user and remote site Reports include E1 Bursty Errored Second Severe Errored Second Degraded Minutes Also available in Statistics 96 Containing 300 alarm records which record the latest alarm type location and date amp time Bursty Seconds Severely Errored Second Degraded Minutes E1 T1 interface Line Loopback Payload Loopback Local Loopback For Controller 220 4 219 4
106. 3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring 7 Map Setup You must do your mapping for the Master Unit This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit The source port is Slot1 Port 3 and the target port is Slot1 port 1 LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 15 20 40 03 24 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target Quad El NON CAS Source Quad El NON CAS Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Slot l O DESDE Port 2B 1 d 3 1 17 d 3 17 3 La 2 LAB i d 2 17 Taso DA 2d 3 2 18 d 318 3e ud LL RIR dg 2 18 sd 3 3 19 d 3 19 sS Sd Zo 3 194 2 19 4d 3 4 20 d 3 0 3 4d e OBS 2008 2 20 TeS et 2 31 5d 3 5 b d deu 3 54 2 E CB 21a 2 21 Clear No 6 d 3 6 22 d 3 22 3 6d Zo 266 3 22 4 2 22 d v Baie 7 d 3 7 23 d 3 23 3 7 d 2 F 3 23a 2 23 8 d 3 8 24 d 3 24 gt Ba 2 8 3 24d 2 24 9d 3 8 25 d 3 25 3 9d 2 9 325 d 225 Source 10 d 3 10 26 d 326 3 10d 2 10 3 26 d 2726 Slot c T El a S aab 27 d S ET 3 11d 2 420 oT 2 29 Port ES 12 d 3 12 28 d 3 28 3 12 d 2 l4 ud Z8 d 2 28 qus popu 13 do 29 d 3 29 dox a ccc ZOO Z 29 14 d 3 14 30 d 3 30 3 14 d 214 3 30d 2 30 Confirm Yes 15 d 3 5 31 d 3 31 3 154 2 15 3 Blood e 31l 16 d 3 16 3 16d 2 16 lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit The source port is Slot 1 Port 1
107. 4 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target Quad El NON CAS Source Quad El NON CAS Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Slot I 222 2 Port i Bs 3 1l d 2 oh Bhd 2 7 2 bd 1 2 Ld 17 tee A EZ 2 2 3 X86 8 2 18 2 2d 2 218d 18 2 eg Zoo 3 3 X908 2 18 2 30 3 2 T9 qd 19 3 4d 2 4 320d 2 20 2 4d 4 2 20d 20 T S T 31 3 54 Zi 5 gt 25d 2 21 2 Bd 5 2 21 a 21 Clear No 6 4 2 9 3 22 d 2 22 2 6d 2 22 d 22 d v tod 3 Td 2 uv d 2 23 2 Jd 7 2 23 d 25 3 Bd 2 8 3 24 d 2 24 2 8d 8 2 24 d 24 2 Cod 2 4 ES AE 2 25 2 4d 9 2 25 d 25 Source 3 104 2 10 3 26 d 2 26 2 10d 10 2 26 d 26 Slot 1 3 deals 211 327 d 2 27 211d 11 2 214 27 Port P2 3 12d 212 3 28d 2 28 212d 12 2 28 18 28 Tass DL 2137 2 13 GEO 2 29 2 13d 13 229d 29 3 14 d 214 3 30d 2 30 2 14 d 14 2 30d 30 Confirm Yes 3 15 d 2 15 3 31 d 2 31 2 15d 15 2 31 d IB 1 3 16d 2 16 2 16 d 16 lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit Note that this map sets up the HDLC Inband Management mapping LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 15 20 40 03 24 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target In Band Source Quad El NON CAS Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Slot IB
108. 6 Link backup function Controller Menu gt C System Configuration gt G Link backup function This link backup function only apply to single E1 T1 mini slot single FOM mini slot and 1FOMA single slot Below sample is to display the link backup function is on and the mode is non revertible The link backup function of FE1 card single E1 is Link A and Link B as backup link and FOM card mini slot is Link C and Link D as backup link NOTE Configuration for link backup will not be changed if the user turns on the backup function without selecting the backup link type or turns off the backup function without clearing the backup link type LOOP AM3440 A System Configuration Backup 17 30 31 08 03 2011 Backup function ON Mode non revertible Link Link A Link B Link C Link D Link Link 2 Link 3 Link 4 Model FEl FE1 FOM FOM QuadE QuadEl Backup Link LlskemBo Lo mie ose Saas As es ESAS Backup Fun ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Link Status Work Idle Work Idle Norma Norma Normal Normal Link Link 5 Link 6 Link 7 Link 8 Link 9 Link10 Link11 Link12 Model QuadE QuadE Backup Link d Tesna mass RASS ao p A Pa e Backup Fun OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Link Status Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 6 2 1 7 QDS1 1 1 protection Controller Menu gt C System Configuration gt G
109. 7 21 2002 Total Connections EK Bad HEC 0 VPI VCI Rx Frames Tx Frames Congestion Bad CRC Bad Len 1 2 01 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 05 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 06 0 0 0 0 0 4 2 07 0 0 0 0 0 5 2 08 0 0 0 0 0 6 z 09 0 0 0 0 0 7 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 9 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 10 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 11 2 4 0 0 0 0 0 12 2 5 0 0 0 0 0 13 2 6 0 0 0 0 0 14 2 J 0 0 0 0 0 15 2 8 0 0 0 0 0 16 2 9 0 0 0 0 0 lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt 6 4 4 Unit Configuration The interface setting displays the egress port type E1 or T1 The Protocol setting specifies the protocol on the line ATM or Frame Relay The Channel Map setting specifies the type of traffic 1 specifies layer 2 traffic and i is idle When the line carries ATM traffic this setting cannot be modified To view the port configuration press C from the port menu the screen will show as below 6 4 4 1 System Setup ATM FR T1 To view the port configuration press C from the port menu SLOT D ATM FR T1 Port System Setup 17 35 29 03 23 2002 FRAME ESF Interface TA CODE B8ZS Protocol ATM YEL ON Channel Map AIS FRAMED illlllllillirlrliillliliidl INBAND OFF INTF LONG HAUL LBO 0 dB lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 116 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 4 4 2 System Setup ATM FR E1 To view the port configuration press C from the port menu SLOT FR
110. 8 19 01 the Firmware Protection Function applies Under Warranty free of charge to upgrade the firmware After Warranty expires Loop Telecom will charge for the firmware upgrade For more detail please contact Loop Telecom or sales representative near you Under the Controller Menu press W to enter in the screen of File Transfer as below Note Check the current hardware version before firmware upgrade Make sure the existing hardware version is compatible to the updated firmware version For more details please contact Loop Telecom LOOP AM3440 A File Transfer 14 51 25 12 12 2011 A gt Download Mainboard Firmware C gt Download Configuration D gt Upload Configuration E gt Download Mainboard Boot up R gt Copy Firmware to Redundant lt lt Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command gt gt 84 6 2 9 1 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Download Mainboard Firmware LOOP AM3440 A ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE Firmware 1 Version V8 17 Firmware 2 Version V8 18 Current Firmware Bank 2 Next Boot Firmware E 2 TFTP Server IP Firmware File Name 104 Os LO 103 40 40 40 40 10 E3 13 13 12 13 11 12 13 11 12 13 11 12 13 11 lt lt ESC key ignore and return Download Firmware BACKSPACE to edit 10 38 01 12 13 2011 ESC to abort 03 07 20 2011 02 09 19 2011 Downloading firmware Received 471 Blocks Received 241297 bytes Checksum ok
111. 8 20 08 03 2011 Master Clk Source INTERNAL Clock Hold Over OFF Second Clk Source INTERNAL Hold Over State Normal Current Clock MASTER CLK Frame Pulse Period 8001 2 Hz Clk Recover Mode MANUAL Clock Status NORMAL Ext Clock Type El1 750hm Dual External Clock Protection Disable lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt Note 1 Clock Hold Over option is for 3E1 plug in card only 2 When the option of Clock Hold Over is ON and the current clock is MASTER CLK the Hold Over State in the screen will show NORMAL When clock source loss occurs the Hold Over State in the screen will show Hold Over 3 Make sure the external clock type corresponds to the physical card type If the system is linked to T1 but the Ext Clock Type is set to E1 setup failure may occur 49 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation The sample screen below shows a T1 clock type LOOP AM3440 A Clock Source Setup 19 07 29 03 01 2001 Master Clk Source SLOT A Second Clk Source SLOT D Current Clock INTERNAL Clk Recover Mode MANUAL Clock Status NORMAL Ext Clock Type STT lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 50 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 1 3 TSI Map Controller Menu gt C System Configuration gt C TSI Map The TSI Map shows the map configuration status for all map slots and ports The sample screen shows Map
112. 9 2011 BACKSPACE to edit gt gt Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Download Configuration LOOP AM3440 A Download Configuration 14 53 39 09 19 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE Please Input nnn nnn nnn nnn BACKSPACE to edit TFTP Server IP 000 000 000 000 Config File Name b lt lt ESC key ignore and return ENTER key accept change gt gt 6 2 9 3 Copy Firmware to Redundant After completed the download firmware the Copy Firmware to Redundant Board screen will be shown Press Yes to copy the new firmware to Redundant controller If the device only has one controller this screen won t show up LOOP AM3440 A Copy Firmware to Redundant Board 10 41 27 12 13 2011 Current Firmware Bank 2 NextBootFirmware Bank 1 gt Transferring Firmware to Redundant Board 00 Transfer Complete el Programming the Flash in Redundant Board 100 Programming Complete Remember to Reboot to Run the New Firmware gt gt Enter password XXXXX 87 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Download Firmware Procedure To download firmware using console port via LoopTerm use the follow procedure Single controller a B O N gt Setup the VT 100 connection Setup TFTP server in PC Download the firmware file xxxxxx run Do warm reset primary controller board Firmware download procedure complete Dual Controllers o N DOO A O N gt Setup the VT 100 connection Setup TFTP server
113. A A LATA A DATA AIS FRAMED CAS OFF FDL O EP Sa bit Sa4 INTE 75 Ohm lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 126 Channel Map Setup Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Select the CH_MAP item on the Port System Setup menu Use this channel map to tell the ATM FR card what time slots are combined to be a logical frame relay channel The logical channel number can be 1 to 31 A 00 will indicate an idle time slot SLOT D ATM FR El Please Input 1 10 Time Slot 01 02 FR Channel 01 01 Time Slot 17 18 FR Channel 00 00 Port Channel Map Setup BACKSPACE to edit 03 01 04 01 05 02 06 02 19 00 20 00 21 00 22 00 07 02 23 00 10 24 58 09 13 2002 08 02 09 03 10 03 TT 03 12 03 13 04 14 00 T5 6 00 00 24 00 25 00 26 00 27 00 28 00 29 00 30 00 31 00 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Frame Relay Management Setup FR to ATM Select the FR MAN item on the Port System Setup menu Use this management setup to tell the protocol details of the ATM network The logical channel number can be 1 to 31 The meanings of the parameters are as follows Column Heading CH Options Meaning Logical channel number Active Activated by user An idle frame relay channel Protocol ANSI Using Q 933 Annex A protocol Using T1 617 Annex D protocol Direction T391
114. AAA ERROR E a e Weste ASS SPSS VESES cpuxees quee OFA 2002 qq FREE pes SS SSeS eiut SO nce lt lt TAB key to show Statistics Report gt gt lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt SLOT D ATM FR El Port 1 Hour Stat Report USER Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 16 seconds SAS SEFS SES SBES Current 15 Min lst Nearest 15 Min 2nd Nearest 15 Min 3rd Nearest 15 Min 4th Nearest 15 Min Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval 0 SAS SEFS SES SBES Current 24 Hour 07 23 2002 07 22 2002 07 21 2002 07 20 2002 07 19 2002 07 18 2002 07 17 2002 lt lt TAB key to show Performance Report gt gt SSES lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt 16 30 04 07 24 2002 SDM CSS SLOT D ATM FR El Port 1 Hour Perf Report LINE Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 33 seconds ES UAS BES SES DM Current 15 Min Interval 0 33 0 0 0 lst Nearest 15 Min Interval 2nd Nearest 15 Min Interval 3rd Nearest 15 Min Interval 4th Nearest 15 Min Interval Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval O0 ES UAS BES SES DM Current 24 Hour Interval 07 23 2002 07 22 2002 07 21 2002 07
115. AC the system of AM3440 will not note the power type so the user needs to choose it manually LOOP AM3440 A Power Setup 17 45 58 08 21 2007 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Power TYPE 48V DC Power TYPE 48V DC lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 6 2 7 19 Multicast Mapping Procedure LOOP AM3440 A Controller Menu 18 03 32 10 08 2009 Serial Number 123026 Redundant Controller Enabled Hardware Version Ver yJ Start Time 11 25 29 10 08 2009 Software Version V8 05 01 09 29 2009 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A DISPLAY SETUP C System Configuration S gt System Setup B gt Clock source Configuration M gt System Alarm Setup Q Alarm Queue Summary W Firmware Transfer Information Summary V gt Store Retrieve Configuration R Redundant Board Information K Clock source Setup P gt Performance Report T gt Bit Error Rate Test LOG MISC U gt Choose a Slot A Alarm Cut Off F gt Log Off SETUP MISC Menu X Clear Alarm Queue O gt Log On SETUP MISC Menu Y gt Controller Return to Default Z Controller Reset gt gt SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command gt 77 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Press S from the Controller Menu screen to enter into the Controller Setup menu see also below screen LOOP AM3440 A Controller Setup 11 49 25 10 09 2009 System SNMP Setu
116. AME CODE CRC RAI AIS CAS FDL Sa bit INTF D ATM FR El Port System Setup ON HDB3 ON ON FRAMED OFF OFF Sal 120 Ohm Interface El Protocol ATM Channel Map 15 56 08 03 27 2002 JIXTLllL211T111T713 3 NAAA AA IATA lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 6 4 5 Alarm History Press H from the port menu to view the alarm history 6 4 5 1 Alarm History FR to ATM SLOT D ATM FR El Port Alarm History 17 24 14 07 21 2002 LOCAL ALARM TYPE THRESHOLD CURR STATE COUNT ALARM RAI O 0 ENABLE AIS O 0 ENABLE LOS O 0 ENABLE LOF O 0 ENABLE BPV 10E 5 O 0 ENABLE ES 1 O 0 ENABLE UAS T O 0 ENABLE css 1 O 0 ENABLE ATM LOS O 0 ENABLE ATM AIS ALM 37 ENABLE ATM RDI ALM L ENABLE ATM LOC O 0 ENABLE FR LKD DISABLE 1 DISABLE lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt 117 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 4 5 2 Alarm History FR to FR SLOT D ATM FR El Port Alarm History LOCAL ALARM TYPE THRESHOLD CURR STATE COUNT ALAR YEL O 0 ENAB AIS O 0 ENABL LOS O 1 ENABL LOF O ER ENABL BPV 10E 5 O 0 ENABL ES 1 O 0 ENABL UAS 1 ALM al ENABL css 1 e 0 ENABL FR LKD ALM 2 ENABL lt lt ESC key to return to previous bar to refresh gt gt 6 4 6 Port Status Ed Ed Dd Dd pH Dd Ed Dd Dd jx 17 24 14 07 21 2002 Press I from the port menu the
117. AVE DTE EXTCLK MASTER DTE EXTCLK SLAVE DTE DYING GASP ALARM LOOP ATTENU ALARM LOW NOISE MARGIN HTUR LINK DOWN Alarm type LOF LOCAL OPTICAL LOS LOCAL OPTICAL RAI LOCAL OPTICAL LOF REMOTE OPTICAL LOS REMOTE OPTICAL Chapter 10 Appendix D Loop AM 3440 A Alarm Trap Information 13 C37 94 Card Vendor Spec fom opt local es 606 fom opt local ses 607 fom opt local uas 608 fom e1 local lof 617 fom e1 remote lof 618 fom e1 local es 619 fom e1 local ses 620 fom e1 local uas 621 fom e1 local bpv 622 Assigned Iso los 441 Iso yel 442 Iso es 443 Iso ses 444 Iso uas 445 14 Dry Contact Dry Contact B Vendor Spec 15 OCU DP Card Vendor Spec 16 RT Card 17 18 Vendor Spec 20 21 RT A Card Vendor Spec 20 21 RT B Card Vendor Spec Assigned dc n1 p1 701 dc n1 p2 702 dc n1 p3 703 dc n1 p4 704 dc n2 p1 705 dc n2 p2 706 dc n2 p3 707 dc n2 p4 708 Assigned ocudp los 461 ocudp oos 462 ocudp es 465 ocudp ses 466 ocudp uas 467 ocudp loopbk 468 ocudp test 469 ocudp lof 470 Assigned lan1 link down 401 lan2 link down 402 Assigned lan1 link down 401 lan2 link down 402 Assigned lan1 link down 401 lan2 link down 402 lan3 link down 403 lan4 link down 404 lan5 link down 405 lan6 link down 406 lan7 link down 407 HAHAHAH 167 ES LOCAL OPTICAL SES LOCAL OPTICAL UAS LOCAL OPTICAL LOF LOCAL E1 LOF REMOTE E1 ES LOCAL E1 SE
118. Clock Loss Second Clock Slot N Pm Loss wci CTRL1 2 EXT clock loss 105 R 254 CTRL1 2 redundant EXT clock loss 105 R 254 SSM switch to Slot N P M m nam SSM switch to Internal Link switch to T1 Backup Link switch to ate QE1 1 1 Link Switch Link switch to QE1 1 1 L es SPRing DSO SNCP switch to 11 Oii i port j ts CE swithto 411 Oiijj i port j ts Map Switch Switch Map switch to m 1 4 Power fail alarm EIE A3 C3 Power Alarm Fan fail alarm 9 Card type mismatch Pyne Match Pyne Match Link ID mismatch Primary start al Redundant loss T Dual CPU Alarm Redundant checksum error 8 Redundant insert C2 Redundant unsync Redundant to primary Log in out Management Alarm No relay SNTP server X fail ok below for alarm action ENABLE for alarm action EN NEW only for firmware version V8 06 01 and up Model 32 controller for all CTRL alarm Plase refer to 10 2 Alarm Model for model type Slot N A D 1 12 O none 99 external R 103 ctrl1 external 104 ctrl2 external Port M 1 12 254 none Note An Cn Cn will clear alarm relay for An 169 Chapter 11 Appendix E Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring 11 Appendix E Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring 11 1 Overview A PDH Shared Protection Ring can be an ideal solution for voice and data transmission networks in that if any one E1 connection is broken the voic
119. Controller Setup 18 26 15 08 03 2011 System SNMP Setup Password TSI Map Setup Select a New TSI Map Copy a TSI Map to Another Clear a TSI Map Command Line nit New Card Clear Empty Slot Link Backup Function QDS1 1 1 Protection DS0 SNCP Setup PDH Ring Protection PDH Ring Diagnostic SNTP Setup TELNET SSH Setup Power Setup UOGi Zi oH UG ANO QC H E nj bl UO OQ U 0 DS J dr ede SEN A A VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV VV lt lt Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command gt gt 6 2 7 1 System Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt A System This menu is allowed to set up configuration for system console port and TSI map Network system setup is used to do different interface LAN WAN IP setup You can enable LAN or WAN or both for point to point communication Setup procedure is as follows If you would like to manage your AM3440 units through inband management go to System Setup MAP to activate TSI map setup first The command path is Main Menu S Controller Setup gt C TSI Map Setup Choose IB inband for target slot and then select the card type and port you would like to use Then choose Yes to confirm your new settings LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 15 38 08 12 03 2008 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target In Band Source Quad El NON CAS Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Slot
120. DH Ring Protection Status only available when the PDH Ring software has purchased You must order the PDH Ring software separately or these related functions will not show on the VT100 menu 48 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 1 1 System Controller Menu gt C System Configuration gt A System The System Configuration shows the current status of device name network console port TSI map and clock LOOP AM3440 A System Configuration 17 17 45 08 03 2011 System Device Name LOOP AM3440 A Network NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer LAN ON 010 003 023 095 255 255 000 000 Ethernet WAN OFF 010 004 001 001 255 255 255 000 HDLC 1 Gateway Interface LAN Gateway IPAddr 000 000 000 000 nband Uses Slot D CONSOLE port Baud Rate 9600 Data Length B eHits Stop Bit l Bit Parity NONE XON XOFF t XOFF TSI map Clock TSI Function 1 1 Bidirection Clock Mode Normal dle Signalling 1010 lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt Note NI Network Interface EN Enable DIS Disable LB Timer Loopback Timer Clock Mode Normal and SSM Synchronous Status Message 6 2 1 2 Clock Source Controller Menu gt C System Configuration gt B Clock Source The screen of Clock Source Setup will show as below Note that the external clock type in this example is E1 LOOP AM3440 A Clock Source Setup Normal Mode 17 1
121. E Map2 DISABLE Map3 DISABLE Map4 DISABLE lt lt New map Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu 14 55 34 09 30 2003 MAP 3 MAP 3 of the following is enabled start hr min 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 then Press D to active gt gt 81 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Enable MAP 3 as the current TSI map Then press Y to confirm the setting or N to abort To save the new map configuration to flash memory press V from the Controller Menu LOOP AM3440 A System Setup New map 14 55 34 09 30 2003 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Last activated TSI Map MAP_3 Change to TSI Map This item will be ignored if anyone MAP_3 of the following is enabled TSI Map switch start hr min Mapl DISABLE 00 00 Map2 DISABLE 00 00 Map3 ENABLE 00 00 Map4 DISABLE 00 00 lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt 82 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 8 System Alarm Setup Under the Controller Menu press M to set up system alarm as below The alarm action includes Disable Enable and EN NEW each supports different alarm commands Please refer to Appendix D Alarm Setup Indication for setup detail The Alarm Relay is applied to configure the Alarm Relay output present on the front panel of AM3440 controller The alarm relay circuit will be triggered when an alarm is detected To return the alarm relay to the no
122. E port Baud Rate 38400 Data Length 8 Bits Stop Bit i l Bit Parity NONE XON XOFF XOFF TSI map Clock TSI Function 1 1 Bidirection Clock Mode SSM dle Signalling 1010 gt gt Change configuration Y N Note to save please use V command 97 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Then exit from the above menu after keying Y to confirm the latest system configuration Go to Quad E1 s Port Menu Under the Port Menu press P to select the E1 T1 port and then press S to get in the Unit System Setup menu Use arrow key to move the cursor at the FDL item and TAB key to select SSM option SLOT 7 Quad El PORT 1 Port System Setup 16 51 00 04 25 2008 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS FRAME ON CODE HDB3 CRC ON RAI ON AIS FRAMED CAS ON SIGNALLING CD 01 CGA NORM OOS BUSY Sa_bit Sal IDLE D5 Protected DISABLE Master ES eges INTF 75 Ohm lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Then back to the Controller Menu press K to do clock source setup Then the following screen will show up This menu is allowed to set up first second and third clock sources The SLOT 9 P1 means port 1 of slot 9 LOOP AM3440 A System Setup CLOCK SSM Mode 17 04 38 08 18 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS First Clock Source Clock Hold Over OFF Second Clock Source Third Clock Source Current Clock INTERNAL Clock Stat
123. IB S535 gt 35 gt Gm Ses SSS SSSSSS gt Port ld 1 l 1 L 1d IB 1 17 sd TS 03 2 4 18 d 3 d 19 q 4 d 20 d TS 2 DI 5 d 21 d Clear No 6 d 22 d d v t d 7 d 23 a 8 d 24 d 9 xd 25 d Source 10 d 26 d Slot E E Lis da 27 d Port s BI 12 d 28 d Tu Sa 204 13 dw 29 d 14 d 30 d Confirm Yes LEA aL a 16 d lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt 59 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Go back to system setup First enable your network by choosing ON for EN option Then key in the IP address and subnet mask of the unit you wish to communicate with You can also choose HDLC or PPP for the frame Press ESC to save your new setting Once you complete the procedures above the AM3440 units will start activating WAN network communication Note 1 To manage your AM3400 units through LAN enable the LAN network and key in the IP address of the unit you would like to manage It is a simple way to manage a specific AM3440 unit Note 2 To setup inband management one 64K timeslot must be assigned for link to the controller CTRL through the internal cross connect XC This timeslot must be either Slot D Port4 or Slot 12 Port4 Below are the plug in card types that will be influenced by the timeslot limitation in either Slot D or Slot 12 Slot Plug in Card Slot D FOM MQE1 RTA Slot 12 RTB 4GH TDMoE QE1 QT1 Although the framing option for each
124. Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode 197 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS 1 D 01 W 7 HN 01 8 1 01 D Lock 2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 T 10 D Non revertible To activate Lock on Working on the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether key in the first index number in the from column and the last index number in the to column e Lock on Primary Lock the data path on the primary timeslot Press P from the screen of DSO SNCP information A prompt message will ask you to select the SNCP circuit which you would like to lock the primary timeslot as the working timeslot Key in the circuit s index number and press Enter Then select Yes for Confirm to do LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Information 16 19 38 10 15 2010 DSO SNCP ENABLE Total DSO SNCP 2 Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS L D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Non revertible 2 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non revertible 198 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup The working timeslot will then be locked in the primary slot and port and will not switch automatically The locked circuit will also change its mode to Lock Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS 1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Lock 2 E 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non revertible To activate Lock on Primary
125. K 4 8K 9 6K Asynchronous Independent mode 0 6K 1 2K 2 4K 4 8K 9 6K 19 2K 38 4K Mux mode 0 6K 1 2K 2 4K 4 8K 9 6K Synchronous Independent mode 0 6K 1 2K 2 4K 4 8K 9 6K 19 2K 38 4K 48K 64K Port Number Card Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 silla Async Async Async Async Async Async Async Async TNE DERT RR Async Sync Async Sync Async Async Sync Async Sync Async Async Async Connector Eight RJ48 port 1 to port 8 DB44 port1 port2 port3 DB44 port4 port5 port6 RJ48 port and RJ48 port8 EINER Ane A three into one conversion cable adapts the DB44 connector to 3 connecters one DB9S and two DB25S Electrical RS232 Interface DCE Note 1 Up to 19 2 Kbps achieved by oversampling at 64 Kbps DTE Interface Data Bridge Card Data Port 8 port data bridge card each card supports up to 120 DSO for data bridge Feature 20 end points per multi drop circuit to into a logical ended 56K or 64K channel Per port supports bridge function to N remote Trib Site N 1 20 5 Data Rate Bridge function Asynchronous Chapter 1 Product Description Support to receive 1200 to 19200 bps asynchronous data via oversampling channel one port with one DS 0 to many Maximum is 20 for remote Tributary data box 20 drops for each DSO to remote Tributary data box and 8 ports RS232 shared the 128 channels OCUDP Interface Card Ports Line Status Indicator Network Connector Electrical Network Connection Transmit Source Impedance
126. Link backup function This function displays the current QDS1 1 1 protection status Below sample shows the port 1 and port 2 of slot 9 10 as circuit protection LOOP AM3440 A QDS1 1 1 Protection 18 28 09 07 29 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Protect Pair Master Backup Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Slot A B FE1 A A e ssa Slot C D FEl A MEE Gi e Slot 1 2 FOM FOM E Slot 3 4 Slot 5 6 jo eee SS Messi umo SAS Slot 7 8 A Slot 9 10 QuadEl QuadEl CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DISABLE DISABLE Siete ITI J SSSSSSSSse decas II SSSSesosss Protection Working Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Slot A B FE1 Slot C D FE1 Slot 1 2 FOM FOM Slot 3 4 Slot 5 6 Slot 7 8 Slot 9 10 QuadEl QuadE1 9 1 10 2 Stot 11 12 4 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Note The highlight on 9 1 means slot 9 port 1 as protection working port 54 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 1 8 DSO SNCP Status Controller Menu gt C System Configuration gt K DS0 SNCP Status This function is to view the current status of DSO SNCP LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Status 13 40 31 04 29 2011 DS0 SNCP ENABLE Total DSO SNCP 1 Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS 01 6 1 0 mo 1 01 1l 1
127. MT BPV ES TEST ATM FR El AIS RAI AIS RAI ERROR ERROR YES FAS NO NO NO RAI COUNT COUNT PATTERN TRANSMITTED NEAR END LOOPBACK lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu OFF OFF 15 46 07 07 24 2002 SPACE key to refresh gt gt 120 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 4 7 Alarm Queue Press Q form the port menu to view the alarm queue SLOT D ATM FR El Unit Alarm Queue 17 24 57 07 21 2002 1 Port A ATM RDI 17 13 34 07 21 2002 2 Port AS ATNOAIS ee 9M9 mS da lT 13 34 07 21 2002 3 Port A FR LKD 17 13 33 07 21 2002 lt lt ESC key return to previous menu or SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 6 4 8 Loopback Test 6 4 8 1 ATM Frame Relay T1 Under the port menu press L to setup the loopback test for the ATM FR T1 interface SLOT D ATM FR T1 Port Loopback Test I 43155 03 23 2002 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE ENTER KEY ITEM SELECT NEAR END LOOPBACK OFF LOCAL PLB LLB SEND LOOPBACK ACTIVATE CODE TO FAR END IN BAND AT amp T P ANSI P ANSI L SEND LOOPBACK DEACTIVATE CODE TO FAR END IN BAND AT amp T P ANSI P ANSI L SEND TEST PATTERN OFF ORSS FULL 1 IN 8 STATUS lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 121 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 4 8 2 ATM Frame Relay E1 Under the port menu press L to setup the loopback test for the ATM FR E1 in
128. Mbps 50 ppm Framing Line Code AMI or HDB3 Connector Input Signal ITU G 703 Electrical Output Signal ITU G 703 Jitter Network Line Interface Mini 4E1 Line Rate 2 048 Mbps 50 ppm Framing Line Code AMI or HDB3 Connector Input Signal ITU G 703 Electrical Output Signal ITU G 703 Jitter Network Line Interface 3E1 Line Rate 2 048 Mbps 50 ppm Framing Line Code AMI or HDB3 Connector Input Signal ITU G 703 Electrical Output Signal ITU G 703 Jitter Function Support DSO SNCP Network Line Interface 4E1 Line Rate 2 048 Mbps 50 ppm Framing Line Code AMI or HDB3 Connector Input Signal ITU G 703 Electrical Output Signal ITU G 703 Jitter Network Line Interface 4T1 Line Rate 1 544 Mbps 32 ppm Output Signal Line Code AMI or B8ZS Framing Input Signal DSX 1 0 dB to 30 dB wALBO Connector ATM Frame Relay Network Line Interface Supporting Network Interworking FRF 5 and service interworking FRF 8 Network Interface T1 Module T1 ATM UNI FR n x 64 Kbps n 1 to 24 E1 Module E1 ATM UNI FR n x 64 Kbps n 1 to 31 Up to 31 logical FR channels can be concentrated de concentrated to FR or ATM Service Ports T1 FT1 interface E1 FE1 interface Support HDLC to FR Support HDLC to ATM Supporting FR to FR multiplexing Support up to 128 DLCls for total of 31 FR interfaces Support up to 128 VCs Peak cell rate on DLCI basis Manufacturing disable enable ATM scrambling for internal testing E1 ATM only AALO an
129. O SNCP Information 16 19 38 10 15 2010 DSO SNCP ENABLE Total DSO SNCP 2 Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS 1 D 01 W7 1 01 8 1 01 D Non revertible 2 S 01 W 7 i 10 8 T 10 D Non revertible The circuit you choose will switch from the original mode to the other Non revertible to revertible or vise versa In the sample screen the original mode for index 1 circuit is Non revertible After we activate Change Mode for the circuit of index 1 its mode will change to Revertible Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS 1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Revertible 2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non revertible To change the mode of a continuous order of index number altogether key in the first index number in the from column and the last index number in the to column Lock on Working Lock the data path on the working slot and port Press L on the screen of DS0 SNCP information A prompt message will ask you to select the SNCP circuit which you would like to lock on its currently working timeslot Key in the circuit s index number and press Enter Then select Yes for Confirm to do The working timeslot will then be locked and will not switch automatically The locked circuit will also change its mode to Lock LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Information 16 19 38 10 15 2010 DSO SNCP ENABLE Total DSO SNCP 2
130. O TS D slot D I SS Se Sone LAC Port 1 d B Ate od roa Tue 05 2 d B 2 18 d 2 d s ud B 3 LO s ud 4 d B 4 20 d 4 d T S 04 5 d 61 21 d 5 d Clear No 6 d 61 2 22 d 6 d d v d Foda Gt 3 23 d 7 d 8d 61 4 24 d 8 d 9 d 295 dl 9 d Source 10 cog 26 100 slot 6 11 d 27 d 11 d Port Pl 12 d 28 d 1 2 sd ASA 01 13 d 29 d 13 d 14 d 30 d 14 d Confirm Yes 15 d 31 d 15 d 16 d 16 d lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu 6 4 10 3 Map slot D ATM FR to slot 1 V 35 card LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target ATM FR Source Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D Spot sl Dj SS Seis cl tones ui Port 1d B 17 d de Xd DS 09 2 5d B 2 18 d 1 zog 3 d B 3 19 y 1 3 d 4 d B 4 20 d n 4 d T S 04 5d A 21 d 5 d Clear No 6 d A 2 22 d 6 d d v ud Tda A 3 23 d 7 d 8 d A 4 24 d 8 d 9 d 1 1 25 d 9 d Source 10 d 1 1 2 26 d 10 d Slot 1 Ti id 1 1 3 27 d Jia Port Pl 12 d aly 1 4 28 d 12 d T au 01 13 q 29 d 13 a 14 d 30 d 14 d Confirm Yes 15 8 si d LBA 16 d 16 d lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu 10 RTR 08 40 SL PO TS PO TS O s 7 8 9 20 21 22 23 24 2 5 26 27 28 29 30 21 32 then Press D to active 08 40 09 13 2002 D SL PO TS Ix O D5 CL A O A a Dj Q gt gt 09 13 2002 D SL PO TS 2 04 0 04 00 1 aa then Press D to active gt gt 124
131. OOF for 2 5 0 5 sec Count UAS Unavailable gt 10 consecutive SES gt 10 consecutive SES Second CSS Controlled Slip frame slip gt 1 frame slip gt 1 Second Table lists below the types of reports available performance parameters provided by each report and the reset commands for each report 37 Chapter 3 Operation Table 3 7 Performance Report Options Report Type Category Menu Command ES uas BES SES CSS LOFC Front Panel Reports USER Network 1 Hour Terminal USER Network LINE Network USER Nemo LINE Network FAR END USER Network LINE Network FAR END Y Report available and can be cleared by admin terminal command Y N C No clear Report available but counts cannot be cleared by the user Report not available 38 Chapter 3 Operation 3 4 LED Operation The front of the AM3440 has LEDs for operation and error indications The indication can be in one or more colors Note that when powering up and self test is in progress the unit front panel LEDs are also used to indicate fault conditions Table 3 8 Front Panel LED Table DS1 DTE ATM FR eo Coo idein POWER Off Power off Green Power on and operational Primary CPU Power Off Power off Green Power on and operational Active CPU fails Pasning Green Normal Normal or alarm disable Alarm Alarm Redundant cr Power Power off Besga Green SS eee l on and act as
132. P S6tUp it a eee er E este rta ti Ads Pret etd ute A 182 13 1 PHYSICAL Requiere cet o e ep etu p RR ERR DEED IE RO cu ec miii a ets 182 13 2 Setup Procedures TAE 184 14 Appendix G AM3440 A Power CONSUMPtION ooooocococccccccccncononnononccnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnn nn nn cnn n rennen nnne 205 LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1 1 Loop AM 3440 Application Illustration 1 of 2 mmm emm 2 Figure 1 2 Loop AM 3440 with Y BOX 2 of 2 nennen nemen nennen nnne nennen 2 Fig re 2 1 Ground Screw EOCalloni aident ripae Pa ri e aa erp Rada PRA ARP KE Ree etta ea RR RN Re o reb exe aad 16 Figure 2 2 DC Power Without Grounding Application essen emen 17 Figure 2 3 Panel Views Main Shelf and CPU eene emnes 18 Figure 2 4 Panel Views for 1 2 slot Power Modules ssseeen eene 19 Figure 2 5 Front Panel View Fan Tray nemi tte teat tra Ra HERR a RP ERR RA a AUS aaa RA EE RR CAR sonando ERRARE Med 20 Figure 2 6 Rear Panel View Fan Tray sssssssssssssseseee eene ener AAA nere en nennen ner en nennen nnns 20 Figure 2 Top View Fans Fay iiiter m e e Da EF An eR Erba Taiana ERE SNC dO ERR De RES 21 Figure 2 8 Jumper Location for Mini Quad E1 Interface sssssseeeeene emen 23 Figure 3 1 HDLC using E router iii rep eee tt re de re dee rne e e OE e edd e ti e tis 41 Figure 6 1 AM3440 Controller Menu Tree erre aeee era a arara errem enr enne 47 Figure 8 1 Inband Managem
133. Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command The PDH Ring Protection screen will appear LOOP AM3440 A PDH Ring Protection 18 10 53 02 16 2012 ARROW KEYS Cursor move Change options by TAB or by typing PDH Ring Protection Ring Station Switching Interval Alarm Filtering Slot Model Port 2 Port 3 Cc D I Quad T1 2 3 PERRAS eS PRRRPRES c 4 MERCI 1 0 E 5 4 MEME LL 1L oO RB 1 1 d 6 HSHSSSs madadas quee 7 MEI I MEL LAM PME EE 8 II SScosss cm 9 e 10 a a a A 11 MEME M E Es 12 Ssss Assess DSssscSE 532252 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt You must now repeat steps 7 and 8 for each of the AM3440 A Slave units in order to complete the PDH Shared Protection Ring setup procedure 181 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup This chapter provides procedures for building a DS0 SNCP Ring with AM3440 CHAJ units and 3E1 cards Please refer to 3E1 plug in manual for detail info Note Both AM3440 CHAJ and CHCJ units can be applied on 3E1 DSO SNCP setup 13 1 Physical Requirement The physical configuration of a DSO SNCP ring should consist of at least three AM3440 units two of which serve as interconnected units and one as an intermediate unit The units are connected by E1 lines To ensure link diversity the east and west E1 line is recommended to exit the same unit
134. R RAI remove 0 09 35 0 27 2004 11 Slot A E 4 MAJOR LOPS Sse SSS Sse Sse Se ace 0 09 53 1 0 27 2004 Les ID LEO A E 4 MAJOR OK e SS 0093 0 27 2004 Looe Slot we E 3 MAJOR A id ii 0 09 31 0 27 2004 14 Slot A E 3 MAJOR LOS SS as SS E 0 09 31 0 27 2004 15 Slot X E 2 MAJOR RAD EGG SS SS 0 0 9 S734 0 27 2004 16 Slot A E MAJOR RAL Sos SS c T ORE MS AIC 0 27 2004 lt lt ESC key return to previous menu or SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 6 5 8 Unit Loopback Setup Under Port Menu press L to do Loopback Test then the screen will show as below Use arrow keys to move the cursor press ENTER key to select items SLOT A MQuad E PORT 2 Port Loopback Test 10 25 24 10 27 2004 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE ENTER KEY ITEM SELECT NEAR END LOOPBAC OFE LOCAL PLB LLB SEND LOOPBAC ACTIVATE CODE TO FAR END PAYLOAD LINE SEND LOOPBAC DEACTIVATE CODE TO FAR END PAYLOAD LINE SEND TEST PATTERN OFF PRBS FULL STATUS lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 141 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 5 9 Unit System Setup To setup unit system press S from Port Menu then the following screen will show up Use arrow keys to move the cursor TAB key to roll up options SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port System Setup 10 26 20 10 27 2004 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS FRAME ON CODE HDB
135. S LOCAL E1 UAS LOCAL E1 BPV LOCAL E1 Alarm type LOS YEL ES SES UAS Alarm type Input port 1 pair 1 Input port 1 pair 2 Input port 1 pair 3 Input port 1 pair 4 Input port 2 pair 1 Input port 2 pair 2 Input port 2 pair 3 Input port 2 pair 4 Alarm type Alarm type LAN1 LAN2 Alarm type LAN1 LINK DOWN LAN2 LINK DOWN Alarm type LAN1 LINK DOWN LAN2 LINK DOWN LAN3 LINK DOWN LAN4 LINK DOWN LAN5 LINK DOWN LAN6 LINK DOWN LAN7 LINK DOWN 27 Chapter 10 Appendix D Loop AM 3440 A Alarm Trap Information lan8 link down 408 19 TDMoE Card Vendor Spec Assigned tdmoe arp lost 1001 tdmoe rx lost 1002 tdmoe cell lost 1003 tdmoe jit buf underrun 1004 tdmoe jit buf overrun 1005 tdmoe eth1 link down 1006 tdmoe eth2 link down 1007 tdmoe eth3 link down 1008 tdmoe eth4 link down 1009 168 LAN8 LINK DOWN Alarm type ARP LOST RX LOST CELL LOST UNDERRUN OVERRUN ETH1 LINK DOWN ETH2 LINK DOWN ETH3 LINK DOWN ETH4 LINK DOWN Chapter 10 Appendix D Loop AM 3440 A Alarm Trap Information 10 7 Alarm Setup Indication Access M System Alarm Setup from the VT100 main menu to activate the alarm actions listed Alarm Setup Alarm Action for type slot port Type Siot Port Note Alarm Cut Off Alarm cut off Po fof 254 No relay Slot Inactive Slot N inactive DOC A1 Slot Startup Slot Startup Slot N startup Ca C1 Slot N P M clock loss External clock loss Master Clock Slot N Pm Loss Raid
136. SC key ignore and return ENTER key accept change gt gt 3 After completed the download firmware the Copy Firmware to Redundant Board screen will be shown Press Yes to copy the new firmware to Redundant controller If the device only has controller this screen won t show up LOOP AM3440 A Copy Firmware to Redundant Board 10 41 27 12 13 2011 Current Firmware Bank 2 NextBootFirmware Bank 1 Copy firmware to Redundant Board are you sure 89 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 4 The screen shows the process of transferring firmware to redundant controller If password protected you need to key in the password LOOP AM3440 A Copy Firmware to Redundant Board 10 41 27 12 13 2011 Current Firmware Bank 2 NextBootFirmware Bank 1 gt Transferring Firmware to Redundant Board 100 Transfer Complete gt Programming the Flash in Redundant Board 100 Programming Complete Remember to Reboot to Run the New Firmware gt gt Enter password XXXXX 5 The firmware download procedure has completed Configure the Controller Reset 1 Command Path Controller Menu gt Z Controller Reset 2 The Reset Control Board screen appears Select Primary and Warm Restart and then press Enter The screen shows Resetting LOOP AM3440 A Reset Control Board 14 52 10 02 29 2012 gt gt Select Redundant System gt gt Restart Mode Cold Restart gt Reseting
137. SYNC lt lt ESC KEY EXIT LEFT ARROW RESET ERROR RIGHT ARROW INJECT AN ERROR gt gt 204 Chapter 14 Appendix G AM3440 A Power Consumption 14 Appendix G AM3440 A Power Consumption There are four types of power modules 48 Vdc 100W 48 Vdc 150W 24 Vdc 150W and 125 Vdc 100W The tables below list the power consumption of the controller card and other plug in cards This information is used to calculate the total power consumption and to determine if a fan tray is required or not Table 14 1 Power Consumption of AM3440 A Plug in cards for 48 Vdc 100W 48 Vdc 150W and 24 Vdc 150W Power Modules Slot Plug in cards and Fan Tray 48 Vdc 100W Power Module and 48 Vdc 150W Power Module 24 Vdc 150W Power Module System Power Consumption Power Consumption Watt Power Consumption Watt Power Consumption Watt CTRL Single controller 4 4 4 Mini Slot Single Slot 1 channel E1 Single E1 interface 1 channel T1 Single T1 interface Mini Quad E1 Four E1 interfaces 1 channel T1 ATM Frame Relay 1 channel E1 ATM Frame Relay 2 LAN port 32 WAN port Router 2 LAN port 64 WAN port Router A Fiber optical interface 3 channel Terminal Server 1 channel EIA530 1 channel RS232 1 channel V 35 1 channel X 21 4 channel E1 4 channel T1 6 channel U interface 10 channel U interface 2 chann
138. Stop Bit leBazt Parity NONE XON_XOFF XOFF TSI map Clock TSI Function 1 iN Multicast Clock Mode SSM dle Signalling 1010 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Inband Uses Slot D___ Note Slot D port 4 can t use unframe mode Inband Uses Slot 12 Note Slot 12 port 4 can t use unframe mode Note To setup inband management one 64K timeslot must be assigned for link to the controller CTRL through the internal cross connect XC In band timeslot 64Kbps must be selected in either Slot D Port4 or Slot 12 Port4 Below are the plug in cards that will be influenced due to the In band timeslot limitation selected in either Slot D Plug in Card or Slot 12 Slot D FOM MQE1 RTA Slot 12 RTB 4GH TDMoE QE1 QT1 1FOMA Although the framing option for each of the 4 ports of a Mini Quad E1 Quad E1 T1 FOM or 1FOMA interface card can be configured either unframed or framed provision for inband management imposes the following limitation When one of these is selected for inband management the Port 4 in that Slot D or 12 must be configured to framed 150 Chapter 8 Appendix B Inband Management The RTA RTB 4GH and TDMoE card supports up to 32 timeslots in normal condition Due to the timeslot limitation one 64K timeslot is already reserved in the port 4 of Slot D and Slot 12 for inband management When these cards are plugged in either Slot D or Slot 12 only a ma
139. UD a EM 122 6 4 9 1 Alarm Setup FR to ATM eio aai e Toa rn sten nnne 122 6 4 9 2 Alarm Setup ER tocF Rz iid e ertet ene ee A RETE eed t Reges 123 6 4 10 AM 3440 TSI MAP SGUD ai iit ti itte Ier ec ERR EPHRAIM 123 6 4 10 1 Map slot D ATM FR to slot B ET card e 123 6 4 10 2 Map slot D ATM FR to slot 6 V 35 Card ea 124 6 4 10 3 Map slot D ATM FR to slot 1 V 35 Card a 124 6 4 10 4 Map slot D ATM FR to HDLC Inband Channel eese 125 6 4 11 System SOUP ear anre O O DI RO DER De ec eate iet 125 6 4 11 1 ATM FR card Configuration reatar aereas 125 6 4 11 2 System Specific to ATM Protocol rear 126 6 4 11 3 Setup Specific to FR FR Protocol ee 130 6 4 12 Clear Alarm Queue and History EAEE E EA AREA EARE enne 133 6 4 13 Clear Performance Data ssssssssssssssssseesseeneneenenmeneme tret nnn nnne snnt nnn Ennn nennen 134 6 4 14 Upgrade FINNIE 2 bet fados odd bei patte teat ec btentftete pode dte PARUM 134 6 4 15 Unit Load Default Configuration ereta nnnm 135 6 4 16 Unit F6set i aeo e A ee ee eure bdo eH aa 135 6 5 Mini Quad E 1 SUb MeNnU ase eire A ia deutet 136 6 5 1 Unit 1 Hour Performance Report nenne erre nennen 137 6 5 2 Unit 24 Hour Performance Report sssssssssssssseseeeeeeee eene 138 6 5 3 Unit Line Availability
140. YSTEM 18 28 37 08 03 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE Please Input hh mm ss mm dd yyyy BACKSPACE to edit System Time Date 18 28 38 08 03 2011 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A Network NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer LAN ON 010 003 023 095 255 255 000 000 Ethernet WAN OFF 010 004 001 001 255 255 255 000 HDLC 00000001 Gateway Interface LAN Gateway IPAddr 000 000 000 000 nband Uses Slot D CONSOLE port Baud Rate 9600 Data Length 8 Bits Stop Bit 1 Bit Parity NONE XON_XOFF XOFF TSI map Clock TSI Function 1 1 Bidirection Clock Mode Normal Idle Signalling 1010 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Below setting is for mapping Slot A s time slot 01 to Slot B s time slot 01 LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 10 57 08 09 29 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target El NON CAS Source El NON CAS Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Slot B O O E ss ume hh Port 1 d A 1 17 a 1 d 17 d ESO 04 2 d 18 d 2 d 18 d 3 d 19 d 3 d 19 dg 4 d 20 d 4 d 20 d T S 01 5 d 21 d 5 d 21 d Clear No 6 d 22 d 6 d 22 d d v sod 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d 8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d 9 d 25 d 9 d 25 d Source 10 a 26 d 10 d 26 d Slot A 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d Port 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d T S 01 13 d 29 d Lo d 29 d 14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d Confirm Yes 15 d SL 42 15 d 3l d 16 d 16 d lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to a
141. active 19 4 nactive 20 5 nactive 21 6 nactive 22 7 nactive 23 8 nactive 24 9 nactive 25 10 nactive 26 IE nactive 27 12 nactive 28 13 nactive 29 14 nactive 30 15 nactive 31 lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu Port Frame Relay Status nactive nactive nactive nactive nactive nactive nactive nactive nactive nactive nactive nactive nactive nactive nactive nactive SPACE key to refresh gt gt 16 03 29 03 27 2002 119 6 4 6 3 ATM Status ATM Status T1 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation SLOT D ATM ATM FR T1 LINE Active SYN C AIS RDI N Ow o0 a e T e N e OW JAH lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 000000000000 00000 Port ATM Status Active Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes AIS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 17 24 50 07 21 2002 RDI LOC Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No SPACE key to refresh gt gt ATM Status E1 SLOT D LINE LOS LOF RCV RCV XMT X
142. allation ATM FR Et Dne tems Defauk RemeSeup O aa 30 Chapter 3 Operation 3 Operation 3 1 Quick Start for Loop AM After installation the user may want to familiarize him with the equipment immediately The following abbreviated instructions will give the user a quick start 3 1 1 Power On Turn power on by attaching a power cable to the front of the unit 3 1 2 Load Default The unit is shipped with factory default setting Upon initial power up you will see the following screen on your VT 100 monitor The AM3440 will automatically load the system hardware configuration stored in the flash memory If you prefer to load the factory default configuration press the ACO button during the countdown ie 3 2 1 tet rr rrr rrrrr nt rrrr Board Slot 0 Press ACO key to load default configuration 3 se s2 sesde ss Init System Configuration Load Previous Test MAP RAM OK Inst IST 90820 ss Redundant board End task ProcHbData evRedToPri happened during initialization Redundant gt Primary takeover R Syc 0 R Init 1 P 0 S 0000 ChkEr 0000 ErCnt 0000 CmdSycEr 00 HBcnt 0000 000 Testing and Init DM9000 Ethernet controller OK Init SCC gt HDLC port e Init RS485 SCC4 Trigger all Task Enable RS485 and Ethernet Init Master Clock 3 1 3 Using Front Panel There is no front panel on the AM3440 A hand held LCD device is available now and
143. and the target port is Slot 1 Port 2 LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 15 20 40 03 24 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target Quad El NON CAS Source Quad El NON CAS Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Slot 1 Port P2 2 d d T LT 17 1 d 3 1 17 d 3 17 ToS GO 2 2 d 2 218 d 18 2d e 18 d 3 18 2 d E x L9 d 19 3d 3 3 19 d 2 Lo 2 4d 4 220 d 20 4d 3 4 20 d 3 20 T S 4 30 2 mod Be EIL od 2l 5d 2 5 21 d 3 2d Clear No 2 6d 6 2 22 d 22 6 d 3 6 22 d 3 22 d v zod 2 Tod 7 2 23 d 23 7 d 39 07 23 d 3 23 2 8d 8 2 24 d 24 8 d 3 8 24 d 3 24 2 9 d Ge A5 d 25 9 d gt 8 25 d 3 25 Source 2 10 d 10 2 26 d 26 10 d 3 10 26 d 3 26 Slot t 1 211d Ll 2 24 2 11 d 3 11 27 d 3 27 Port Pl ete d 12 2 28 d 28 12 d Le 28 d 3 28 Wu pu 2 45 A l3 2909 29 138 31053 29 d 3 9 2 14d 14 2 30 d 30 14 d 3 14 30 d 3 30 Confirm Yes 2 15 d 15 2 3X d IB T 15 d 3 55 31 d 3 31 2 16d 16 16 d 3 16 lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt 173 Chapter 11 Appendix E Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit The source port is Slot 1 Port 2 and the target port is Slot 1 Port 3 LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 15 20 40 03 2
144. applies to some selective plug in cards This device will allow configuration of and access to the various features without the need of a VT100 terminal More detail please refer to LCD manual Note Order separately for the hand held LCD device 3 1 3 1 Review of Default Settings All the default settings can be reviewed or changed This is done by selecting the menu item Either a sub menu is shown or the selected setting is indicated with an asterisk 3 1 3 2 Map Setup Connect a VT100 terminal to the Console port Press lt o gt to logon then press s for system setup Move the cursor to c TSI MAP Setup The TSI MAP Setup screen shows up 31 Chapter 3 Operation To change the settings use arrow keys to select time slot Press lt Tab gt to change the port values and enter numbers for the time slot Press lt Esc gt to exit the TSI map 3 1 3 3 DS1 Next adjust the DS1 settings 3 1 3 4 Unit Selection To review or change Slot settings press lt U gt Choose a Slot from the main menu 3 1 4 Using Terminal To use the RS232 interface to configure the unit connect a VT 100 terminal to the CONSOLE button down button up connector using a null modem cable The VT 100 terminal can be a PC running a VT 100 emulator software Upon connection press ENTER and ESC alternately to bring the main menu into view Press O Log On to see the full menu Press S System Setup to review or change the configuration 3 1
145. ar the related TSI and clear the slot with ZERO Select Slot 11 Clear OK lt lt ESC key ignore and return ENTER key accept change gt gt 72 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 7 11 Link back up For Link back up screen please refer to Appendix A 6 2 7 12 QDS1 1 1 Protection For QDS1 1 1 protection screen please refer to Appendix C 6 2 7 13 DSO SNCP Setup Follow the command path Controller Menu S System Setup K DSO SNCP Setup to access DSO SNCP setup Set DSO SNCP to ENABLE and set Action to Create Then press ENTER LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Setup 09 49 51 10 09 2009 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS DSO SNCP ENABLE Using Map MAP 1 Action Create lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Select two 3E1 cards for DSO SNCP protection and a particular plug in card as the protected unit and confirm with the setting LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Creation 09 49 12 10 09 2009 Please Input decimal number 1 31 BACKSPACE to edit Protection Group Creation Using map 1 Total DSO SNCP 5 Protected Slot A El EXSPPDD De lentar s aaa ya O na atlas iets a a Port NON CAS T S 01 Count 05 Primary Slot 1 3E1 IE AER Te ea RE Een Port P1 NON CAS Protection Delay 00 ToS 0 Upstream Send AIS On Secondary Slot 2 3E1 2989889 7 iR Nen M ERE TEE Port P1 NON CAS Protection Delay 00 T S 01 Upstream Send AIS On
146. atus 9407 OFF OFF lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu 10 24 27 10 27 2004 SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 6 5 6 Unit Alarm History To view the unit alarm history press H from Port Menu LOCAL RAI AIS LOS LOF BPV ES UAS CSS ALARM TYPE SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port Alarm History THRESHOLD CURR STATE 10E 5 lt lt ESC key to return to Q OO QOO 0 070 previous menu COUNT 0 aos so ALA MAJO MAJO MAJO MAJO MAJO MAJO MAJO MAJO 10 24 44 10 27 2004 RM AHRAADAAADA SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 140 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 5 7 Unit Alarm Queue Under Port Menu press Q to view the alarm queue as the following screen shows SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Unit Alarm Queue 10 25 10 10 27 2004 l Slot At E 4 MAJOR UAS remove 0 5 2 4 2 5 T 0 27 2004 Zo ocu BLE A E 3 MAJOR UAS remove Os 2A 5A 0 27 2004 e S Lot A E 4 MAJOR VAS Ss E Se SS 0 24 49 0 27 2004 4 Slot A E 3 MAJOR UAS cus SA PRADA SS 0 24 49 0 27 2004 DS SLOT XA E 4 MAJOR UAS remove 05 0 9 7 38 0 27 2004 6 Slot A E 3 MAJOR UAS remove 0 09 38 0 27 2004 Teer SO o E 4 MAJOR URSS ESAS AS ASAS 00937 0 27 2004 8 Slot A E 3 MAJOR TASTE DI SS SEE 0 09 3 0 27 2004 9 Slok A E 2 MAJOR RAI remove 053109539 0 27 2004 TO Soto A E MAJO
147. atus Active Notify 1 2 Name groupl Tag groupl Type Trap Status Active lt lt ESC gt return to menu UP DOWN gt Target Parameter Notify D gt delete gt gt 67 11 24 06 12 08 2006 LEFT RIGHT gt prev next Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 7 3 Password Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt B Password Under the Controller Setup menu press B to enable or change password LOOP AM3440 A 18 32 57 08 03 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Enable Password YES Change Password NO lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 6 2 7 4 TSI Map Setup Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt C TSI Map Setup Access the TSI Map setup it allows up to set up to four maps setting but only one can active After choose the map number select the desired slot and port number for the mapping target Next select the starting timeslot number T S and the timeslot amount T S and data or voice mode d v for the target Also select the desired slot port and starting timeslot number T S for the mapping source After setup select Yes for confirmation LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 18 04 10 08 01 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO Target E NON CAS Source Quad El NON CAS Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Slot A
148. ave 1310 1550 SC Subscriber Connector 30 Chapter 1 Product Description G SHDSL Line Interface Number of ports 20r4 Line Rate for 4 channel G shdsl n x 64 Kbps n 3 to 31 Line Rate for 2 channel G shdsl n x 64Kbps n 3 to 15 Line Code 16 TCPAM full duplex with adaptive echo cancellation Connecotr RJ45 Electrical Unconditioned 19 26 AWG twisted pair Sealing current Max 20 MA source current Clock Source From System Line Diagnostic Test G SHDSL Loopback To LINE To bus BERT QRSS DTE Interface X 21 Data Port 6 port DTE X 21 card 1 port DTE X 21 card Data Rate 56 or 64 Kbps n 1 to 32 Connector DB15S DTE Interface V 35 Data Port 6 port DTE V 35 card 1 port V 35 card Data Rate 56 or 64 Kbps n 1 to 32 Connector DB25S optional conversion cable DB25S to M34 connector DTE Interface V 36 Data Port 6 port DTE V 36 card Data Rate 56 or 64 Kbps n 1 to 32 Connector DB25S optional conversion cable DB25S to DB37 connector DTE Interface EIA530 RS449 Data Port 6 port EIA530 DTE card 1 port ElA530 card Data Rate 56 or 64 Kbps n 1 to 32 Connector DB25S optional conversion cable DB25S male to DB37 female connector for RS449 DTE Interface RS232 Data Port 1 port RS232 card Data Rate 56 or 64 Kbps n n 1 2 Mapping Any sequential time slots DTE Interface RS232 X 50 mux 8 port Data Port 8 port RS232 cards MUX Maximum 5 subrate port per 64K bps Data Rate Mux mode 0 6K 1 2K 2 4
149. ctive gt gt 80 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Below setting is for mapping Slot A s time slot 01 to Slot 1 Port 1 s time slot 01 LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 10 57 08 09 29 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target Quad El NON CAS Source El NON CAS Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS SLOE 1 Port Pl 1 1 d A uh 174 10 1 d 157 sd queo 01 2 d 18 d 2 d 18 d x RO 19 d 3 19 d 4 d 20 d 4 d 20 d T S 01 ga 2 8 gt od 21 d Clear No 6 d 22 d 6 d 22 d d v 17 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 q 8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d 9 d oru 9 d 25 d Source Long 26 d 105 26 d Slot E A 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d Port 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d TS 01 ld 29 d 13 d 29 d 14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d Confirm Yes 15 d 31 d 15 d Buy id 16 d 16 d Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt Press D to enable this map as the current map LOOP AM3440 A System Setup Please use D command and V command next screen main menu gt gt Press any key to continue MAP to active map to save maps to 14 49 50 02 21 2005 as current map Flash memory LOOP AM3440 A ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE System Setup TAB ROLL OPTIONS Last activated TSI Map Change to TSI Map This item will be ignored if anyone TSI Map switch Mapl DISABL
150. d 12 KHz 16 KHz Power 10dBm Sensitivity 18dBm to 45dBm manufacture option Loop Start GND Start Metering Pulse 12 KHz 16 KHz DTMF Dialing Pulse PLAR Battery Reverse support Line Reverse Signaling for Billing transparent Voice Card 12FXS 12FX0 24FXS 24FXO 12 FXS FXO Connector 24 FXS FXO Connector Alarm Conditioning Encoding AC Impedance Longitudinal Conversion Loss Cross talk measure Gain Adjustment Signal Distortion Frequency Response Idle Channel Noise Variation of Gain FXO FXS Loop Feed FXS signalling FXS Ringing Signaling Optional Signaling for special order Signaling Bit A B C D Twelve RJ11 One RJ21X Female CGA busy after 2 5 seconds of LOS LOF A law or p law user selectable together for all Balanced 600 or 900 ohms selectable together for all gt 46dB Max 70dBmO 21 to 10 dB 0 1dB step transmit amp receive gt 25dB with 1004 Hz OdBm input 0 25 to 1 dB from 300 to 3400 Hz coincide with ITU T G 712 Max 65 dBm0p 0 5dB Ringing REN 0 5B AC Detectable Ringing 25 Vrms Loop Resistance lt 1800 Q DC d ON HOOK C Impedance OK gt 1MO DC Impedance OFF HOOK 235 O 25mA feed 90 Q 100mA feed 48Vdc or 24Vdc with 25mA current limit per port Jumper Selectable 25mA 30mA 35mA Normal Automatic Ring down 1 REN at 5K meters per port 16 7Hz 20Hz 25Hz 50Hz user selectable for all ports 38 to 85 Vrms sine wave 76 Vrms for default
151. d S Za 9 Figure 2 7 Top View Fan Tray Table 2 1 Power Connector for Fan Tray Table 2 2 Power Connector for Main Unit The console port is configured as a DCE device with a DB 9 female connector Pin definitions and pin connections are listed in Table below Table 2 3 Console Port 4 Unassigned 5 sSgeGemd 6 DaaSeRexy DE 7 Umsimed 8 Cleartosend ooe pa unassigned 21 Chapter 2 Installation Ethernet port can be connected via Ethernet 10 Base T interface Pin definition is listed in Table below Table 2 4 Ethernet Port TPTX TP Driver Output TPTX TPRX TP Receive Input EXA 2 3 4 Alarm Relay The Alarm Relay is applied to configure the Alarm Relay output present on the front panel of AM3440 Controller Card Alarm Relay outputs are provided for operators to drive external alerting devices such as flashing lights and sirens The Alarm Relay signals when the device has exceeded its alarm severity The Alarm Relay will act on pre set conditions configured by the user according to the tables below When the alarm setup is Enabling the alarm relay circuit will be triggered if the alarm is detected To return the alarm relay to the normal state after it is enabled the user has three modes to choose from Auto Period and Manual For detailed information please refer to the section System Alarm Setup in the chapter of System Setup
152. d AAL5 are supported in the ATM adaptation layer Support VBR service ANSI and ITU FR management protocols are supported Flash memory software download through RS485 Only the PVC type of ATM FR service is supported n x 64 Kbps n 1 to 24 n x 64 Kbps n 1 to 31 Router Interface Number of ports Physical Interface Connector Routing protocol 2 LAN ports Max 32 WAN ports 10 BaseT x 1 10 100 BaseT x 1 RJ45 RIP I RIP II DSX1w 0 7 5 15 dB LBO DA ESF selectable RJ48C ITU G 704 BNC RJ48C 75 ohm Coax 120 ohm twisted pair ITU G 823 ITU G 704 DB25S 75 ohm Coax 120 ohm twisted pair ITU G 823 ITU G 704 BNC RJ48C 75 ohm Coax 120 ohm twisted pair ITU G 823 ITU G 704 BNC RJ48C 75 ohm Coax 120 ohm twisted pair ITU G 823 DSX1w 0 7 5 15 dB LBO DA ESF selectable RJ48C Data Rates Supporting Protocols Router A Interface Number of ports Physical Interface Connector Routing protocol Supporting Protocols Diagnostic QoS Router B Interface Number of ports Physical Interface Connector Routing protocol Supporting Protocols Diagnostic QoS Chapter 1 Product Description Channelized N x 64 Kbps 1x n x32 TCP IP PPP HDLC 2 LAN ports Max 64 WAN ports Each WAN port has data rate n x 64K bps 1x n x32 x 4Mbps for total of all 64 WAN ports 10 100 BaseT x 2 RJ45 RIP I RIP Il OSPF Static PPP IPCP BCP MLPPP HDLC Frame Relay and Cisco compatible HDLC NAT NAPT DHCP Pi
153. e 0 24 2004 ADO e AS CAE AA AA 0 23 2004 0 22 2004 0 21 2004 0 20 2004 lt lt TAB key to show Statistics Report gt gt lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt Press TAB key to display the 1 hour statistics report as below shows SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port 1 Hour Stat Report 10 22 48 10 27 2004 LINE Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 754 seconds AS SEFS SES SBES SSES SDM S099 Current 15 Min 100 00 99 469 0 5305 0 5305 0 0000 6 6666 0 3921 List Nearest Lb Min SS RS RS SA Ri A A 2nd Nearest 15 Min oS O Se SAA O O NA O nossa Ss 3rd Nearest 15 Min SS O SS A Sp es ee SS A SS 4th Nearest 15 Min A A ARS O E epe pu SiS AA O VEI nene pie SSS Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval O0 AS SEFS SES SBES SES DM CSS Current 24 Hour 0 26 2004 LPO A A abe A A e AA A NS UI 0 25 2004 a A A eee A A ee Pi A eene 0 24 2004 00000000 2222 222 0 23 2004 A A A A AS el li ee ie dene pt 0 22 2004 00000000 2222222 2222 222 0 21 2004 0 20 2004
154. e screen of DSO SNCP Setup choose ENABLE for DS0 SNCP and Create for Action Then press ENTER for detailed configuration setup LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Setup 14 20 45 10 15 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS DSO SNCP ENABLE Using Map MAP 1 Action Create lt lt ESC key ignore and return ENTER key accept change gt gt On the screen of DS0 SNCP Creation choose the protected interface by selecting the slot and port where the desired interface locates Then key in the desired T S timeslot and count the amount of the timeslot The total timeslot number for the protected slot will show up in dot formats Tarien Let te ue eus and the location of the alphabet P protected indicates the timeslot number that is occupied by the currently working DSO SNCP ring Same procedures should be used on setting up the primary and secondary timeslot on 3E1 cards Note that the T S for the primary and secondary slot should be the same As the sample screen shows the number in the T S column for primary and secondary are both 1 On the sample screen below we choose E1 as the protected interface port 1 of the 3E1 card in slot 7 as primary and port 1 of the 3E1 card in slot 8 as secondary The total timeslot number is 31 The working W DSO SNCP occupies timeslot 1 of both primary and secondary 3E1 cards The location of P protected and W working
155. e On Hook 1 1 0 1 0 0 PLM A to Line Line Off Hook 0 1 O 1 1 0 Battery 48V 1 1 O 1 1 PLM B to Monitor Battery 6V 0 1 0 1 1 11 Chapter 1 Product Description TDMoE Combo Gigabit Ethernet GbE Interface Number of Ports 2 Speed 10 100 1000M bps Connector RJ45 for twisted pair GbE LC for optical GbE auto detection Gigabit Ethernet GbE Interface Number of Port 2 Speed 10 100 1000 BaseT Connector RJ45 Ethernet Function Basic Features MDI MDIX for 10 100 1000M BaseT auto sensing Ping function contained ARP Per port programmable MAC hardware address learn limiting max MAC table 8192 8k entry Packet Delay Variation Unframed T1 Up to 340 ms Framed T1 Up to 256 ms Et up to 256 ms Framed T1 with CAS Up to 192 ms Packet Transparency Packet transparency support for all types of packet types including IEEE 802 1q VLAN and 802 1ad Q in Q QoS User configurable 802 1p CoS ToS in out going IP frame Traffic Control Ingress packet Rate limiting buckets per port for Ethernet port Supporting Rate based and Priority based rate limiting for LAN port Granularity a From 64 Kbps to 1 Mbps in increments of 64 Kbps b From 1 Mbps to 100 Mbps in increments of 1 Mbps c From 100 Mbps to 1000 Mbps in increments of 10Mbps Pause frame issued when the traffic exceeding the limited rate before packet dropped following IEEE802 3X Jitter amp Wander PPM per G 82
156. e Setup 10 25 48 09 13 2002 Please Input 1 10 BACKSPACE to edit CH DLCI VPI VCI BR IWK amp Translation DE CLP index 4 00 HDLC 103 00103 0064 MAP 125 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 126 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 127 0 0 0 0 0 lt 0 gt Network MAP 128 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 1 1 16 100 100 64 lt 64 Network MAP 2 2 0 101 101 256 0 Network 0 3 3 18 102 102 64 64 Network MAP 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Connection Table Setup FR to ATM Select the CONN TAB item on the Port System Setup menu Use this management setup to link the connection table to that of the ATM network The channel number can be 1 to 31 All the numerical entries must be coordinated with the ATM network The meanings of the table columns are as follows Column Heading Options 1 31 Meaning Logical channel number 16 991 Data Link Connection Identifier within the channel 1 255 Virtual Path Identifier from ATM 1 65535 Virtual Channel Identifier from ATM 1 1920 Bit Rate requested in Kilobits sec for this VC Blank 1 1920 Actual Bit Rate allocated Kilobits sec IWK amp Translation Network SVC Mode1 SVC Mode 2 SVC YES SVC NO Network inter
157. e and data communication system will still function This protection is made possible by mapping a loopback to where the channel came from In a PDH Shared Protection Ring each line is split in two directions The working line outside line in the diagram below travels in a counter clockwise direction The protection line inside line travels in a clockwise direction While the is no theoretical limit to the number of nodes in a ring each node needs 2 3 seconds to stabilize SSM clock switching after a break occurs In our sample diagram below we have used five nodes Note ULSR ring does not suport E1 unframe mode Users must use E1 frame mode to set up a ULSR ring Management PC EEE Inband Inband Mamnagement is set up by Port B Port C assigning1 DSO 64K for inband management purposes on the TSI 4E1 TS1 31 4E1 timeslot map of each AM 3440 A unit CIk A Internal TS1 31 TS1 31 TS1 2 Port C e TS34 Port A sn o ii To Tees stat Clk A B Clk A B Clk A B TS9 10 170 Chapter 11 Appendix E Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring 11 2 Setup Instructions 1 Nodes Set up four nodes each of which consists of a Loop AM3440 A device equipped with four Quad E1 cards or alternatively four Mini quad E1 cards or four E1 Fiber Optical Module Each of these nodes will be referred to as Slaves 2 Master Unit Set up a Master unit
158. e deactive for the backup function Detail fields are explaining in the following table 2 When the setting finished press ESC to save the configuration A prompt will ask Are you sure Y N Press Y You will automatically return to the Controller Setup screen Note Both backup links shall have the same FRAME and CAS setting Please return to controller menu and go to unit setup for setting LOOP AM3440 A System Setup Backup 15 14 36 08 18 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS oro oco es Mode Link Link A Link B Link C Link D Link 1 Link 2 Link 3 Link 4 Model FEl FE1 FT1 FT1 QuadT1 QuadEl QuadEl Backup Link Link B Link D PERGE CEG TE RESSE SS Backup Fun OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Link Status Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Force Switch Link Link 5 Link 6 Link 7 Link 8 Link 9 Link10 Link11 Linkl2 Backup Fun OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Link Status Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Force Switch f protection type changed ex from 1 1 to 1 1 Please re setup map Field Setting Options Default Backup function ON OFF ON 1 1 ON 1 1 OFF Mode non revertible revertible non revertible Backup Link Choose the backup link N A 147 Configure the TSI Map Chapter 7 Appendix A Link Backup Function Command Path Main Me
159. ection The protection line inside line travels in a clockwise direction While the is no theoretical limit to the number of nodes in a ring each node needs 2 3 seconds to stabilize SSM clock switching after a break occurs In our sample diagram below we have used five nodes Management PC HDLC Inband Inband Mamnagement is set up by assigning1 DSO 64K for inband management purposes on the TSI timeslot map of each AM 3440 A unit Port A jr544142 411 Feodo 176 Chapter 12 Appendix F Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring T1 12 2 Setup Instructions 1 Nodes Set up four nodes each of which consists of a Loop AM3440 A device equipped with four Quad T1 cards Each of these nodes will be referred to as Slaves 2 Master Unit Set up a Master unit which consists of a Loop AM3440 A device equipped with three Quad T1 cards and a single Router card 3 VT 100 Each AM3440 A can be set up individually using a VT 100 monitor 4 Clocks The clocks must be set up on each of the AM 3440 A units If you have no SSM source at the MASTER unit set the clock for this unit at NORMAL SLAVE units must have their clock set at SSM LOOP AM3440 A System Setup CLOCK Normal Mode 15 16 51 03 24 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Master Clk Source INTERNAL Second Clk Source INTERNAL Current Clock MASTER CLK Clk Recover Mode MANUAL C
160. el G SHDSL 2 pairs w o line power O71 CO D9 OO COP DO 6 DO DOP DM CO D GO CO DO DO NO a CO NO OO WIN DO DOP DM OO DO CO CO DO DO PO a CO NO OO COP DO 6 DO DOP DM OO DO CO CO DO DO DO 4 channel G SHDSL 1 pair w o line power q al q 8 channel G 703 card at 64 Kbps data rate N N N 8 channel Dry Contact I O 8 channel 2W 4W E amp M BIO NJ 12 channel FXS gt e 12 channel FXO S 12 channel Magneto Z gt 1 channel low speed optical C37 94 4 channel low speed optical C37 94 8 channel RS232 with X 50 subrate 8 channel Data Bridge Card 8 LAN port 64 WAN port Router B 3 channel E1 Conference Card A o o 2 m 2 B2 BIO BIO TDMoE e y q ZP ojo gt N OCUDP N A 1FOM A na oo 00 Dual Slot 6 channel X 21 V 11 6 channel V 35 6 channel V 36 6 channel EIA530 RS449 card 24 channel FXS OO OD BI BIN E 205 z S O9 9 B BIN gt wo Go OP O A Chapter 14 Appendix G AM3440 A Power Consumption Slot Plug in cards and Fan Tray 48 Vdc 100W POET 24 Vdc 150W System Power 48 Vdc 150W Power Module Consumption Power Module Power Power Power Consumption Consumption Consumption Watt Watt Watt 24 channel FXO 8 8 8 2 channel G
161. ent Diagram ssssssssessse eene enne nenne enne nens 149 Figure 9 1 Connection for AM3440 and Y BOX with BNC connectors eene 155 Figure 9 2 Connection for AM3440 and Y BOX with RJ48C connectors 155 Figure 9 3 Line Protection for Quad El Card nennen ener nens 157 Figure 13 1 Sample Application for 3E1 DS0 SNCP Setup nnne 183 Figure 13 2 Application for BERT and Loopback Diagnosis erre 201 LIST OF TABLES Table 2 1 Power Connector for Fan Tray eeiccseni center EEE penc cas 21 Table 2 2 Power Connector for Main Unit nennen enne nnns 21 Table 2 3 Console Port inno e otc se E niece beue taie tee Blbuse cu ad 21 Table 2 4 Ethernet Port esc eco tii ec xi ceat bci iia ins 22 Table 2 5 Alarm Relay Circuit Contact State When Alarm Setup is Enable 22 Table 2 6 Alarm Relay Circuit Contact State When Alarm Setup is Disable 22 Table 2 7 FUSE Relay Connector cti i tnt re RH ct chat RUE D EE HU reti diecia diste ice dite 23 Table 2 8 Circuit protection for Mini Quad E1 Interface sss 24 Table 2 9 V 35 DB25 DTE Port Pin Deflpitlo suiit tetto ee ete e setede rata ice 25 Table 2 10 V 36 EIA530 DB25 DTE Port Pin Definition rear 26 Table 2 11 X 21 V 11 and DB15 DTE Port Pin Definition rear 26 Table 2 12 RS232 DB25 DTE Port Pin Definition ssseseeene enne 27 Table 2 13 DB25 Mini Q
162. er 11 Quad El PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Port Number P3 NON CAS SS SS UELLE 3 ld D p 3 17 vd D 17 3 2d D 2 318 da D 18 3 Sd D 3 3 19 d D 19 3 4d D 4 3 20 d D 20 3 5d D 5 3 2l d D Zi 3 6d D 6 322d D 22 3 od B 7 3 23 a D 23 3 8d D 8 324d D 24 3 9d D 9 3 25 d D 2 5 310d D 10 3 26 ad D 26 ay il qd D 1 1 3 27 d D 27 3 12 d D 12 3 28 ad D 28 3 13 dad D 13 329 d D 29 3 14 d D 14 3 30d D 30 3 1 5 d D 15 3 31 d D 31 3 L6 d D 16 lt lt Press ESC to return to previous menu gt gt Note D displays either d v data voice Another example of Slot 9 Quad E1 current map configuration status It indicates Slot 9 Quad E1 Port 1 Timeslot 5 to 9 mapping to Slot A Time Slot 5 to 9 LOOP AM3440 A System Configuration Current Map 16 16 02 07 29 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Current Map Slot Number Quad El PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Port ao NON CAS 1d 17d 2 d 18 d 3 d 19 d 4 d 20 d al 5 d A 5 21 d 1 6d A 6 22 d Bl 7 d A 7 23 d 1 8d A 8 24 d 1 9d A 9 25 10 d 2 6 d 11 d 27 d 12 d 28 d 13 d 29 d 14 d 30 d 15 d 31 d 16 d lt lt Press ESC to return to previous menu gt gt 52 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 1 5 Power Fan Status Controller Menu gt C System Configuration gt E Power Fan Status It shows the current status of power1 power2 total power consumption fan1 and fan2 LOOP AM3440 A Power Fan
163. es 2 15 d 15 15 d 315 2 16 d 16 16 d 3 16 lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt 179 Chapter 12 Appendix F Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring T1 This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit The source port is Slot 1 Port 2 and the target port is Slot 1 Port 3 LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 15 20 40 03 24 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target Quad T1 NON CAS Source Quad T1 NON CAS Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Slot l c Port BS 3 Ird 2 oh 3d 2 7 2 bd Lia jT ive A DL EZ 2 2 3 8 q 2 18 2 2d 2 218d 1 18 2 weg Zo 2 3 Yo ce 2 19 E ES 3 2 19d 1 19 3 4d ze cb OR umo 2 20 2 4d 4 220d 1 20 T S 4 24 2 5g Zone uw zl 221 2 Bd 55 2 2 La 1 23 Clear No 6 4 2 3 22 d 2 42 2 6d 6 222 d 1 22 d v tod 3 Td 2 d 323 od 2 23 2 id 7 223 d 123 3 Bd 2 8 3 24d 2 24 2 8d 8 2 24 d IB 1 2 Cod 2 d 2 9d 9 Source 3 104 2 10 210d 10 Slot tr i e dala vg 211 211 4 11 Port s BZ 3 12d 2 12 2 12 d 12 Tass DL 2137 2 13 2 13d 13 3 14 d 2 14 2 14 d 14 Confirm Yes 3 15 d 2 15 2 15d 15 3 16d 2 16 2 16 d 16 lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit Note that this map sets up the HDLC Inband Management ma
164. eslots in normal condition Due to the timeslot limitation one 64K timeslot is already reserved in the port 4 of Slot D and Slot 12 for inband management When these cards are plugged in either Slot D or Slot 12 only a maximum of 31 timeslots can be set LOOP AM3440 A System Setup SYSTEM 09 39 08 08 18 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS System Time Date 09 39 08 08 18 2010 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A Network NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer LAN ON 010 003 023 010 255 255 000 000 Ethernet WAN OFF 020 001 001 002 255 255 000 000 HDLC 00000001 Gateway Interface LAN Gateway IPAddr 000 000 000 000 nband Uses Slot D Note Slot D port 4 can t use unframe mode CONSOLE port Baud Rate 38400 Data Length 8 Bits Stop Bit 1 Bit Parity NONE XON XOFF XOFF TSI map Clock TSI Function 1 1 Bidirection Clock Mode Normal dle Signalling 1010 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt From the Controller Setup menu and press B to access Trap and Community Here set up the trap IP address and its community LOOP AM3440 A Trap and Community 0 59 31 12 08 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE BACKSPACE to edit ESC to abort Get Community public Set Community public Trap IP 1 000 000 000 000 Community Name public Trap IP 2 000 000 000 000 Community Name public Trap IP 3 000 000 000 000 Community Name public Trap IP 4 000 000 000
165. etup SYSTEM 09 39 08 08 18 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS System Time Date 09 39 08 08 18 2010 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A Network NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer LAN ON 010 003 023 010 255 255 000 000 Ethernet WAN ON 020 001 001 002 255 255 000 000 HDLC 00000001 Gateway Interface LAN Gateway IPAddr 000 000 000 000 nband Uses Slot D or 12 Note Slot D or 12 port 4 can t use unframe mode CONSOLE port Baud Rate 38400 Data Length 8 Bits Stop Bit JsBXt Parity NONE XON XOFF XOFF TSI map Clock Clock Mode Normal Idle Signalling 1010 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 178 Chapter 12 Appendix F Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring T1 7 Map Setup You must do your mapping for the Master Unit This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit The source port is Slot1 Port 3 and the target port is Slot1 port 1 LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 15 20 40 03 24 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target Quad T1 NON CAS Source Quad T1 NON CAS Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Slot l O Port gt Bi 1 d 3 1 1174d 3 17 3 La 2 XX o3 id 2 17 Taso DA 2d 2 ea 318 3e ud cu 08 2 18 sd g 2 LISA 3 19 sS Sd Zouk ca td 2 19 4d By RED 3 0 3 4d 2 Roc Bug 2 20 T S 24 5d 3
166. ew for VACM every group can define their own security level and have read and write access to view Item shows reserved means that the item shown is not currently supported by this version View contains 1 or more MIB sub trees The V3 driver will check incoming packages LOOP AM3440 A Access 1 3 Group Name Security Model Security Level Context Prefix Context Match Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name Status ESC return to ENTER edit A gt add SNMP Setup VACM loopl V3 USM AuthPriv reserved reserved loop loop reserved Active Storage NonVolatile View Family 1 5 View Name one Sub tree TB A 176 3 Mask reserved Type include Status Active Storage NonVolatile previous menu UP DOWN gt Access View D gt delete gt gt 11 18 28 12 08 2006 LEFT RIGHT gt prev next gt gt V3 Target amp Notify Setup Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt S SNMP Setup gt F V3 Target amp Notify Setup F command is to notify the V3 target similar to situation with V1 trap ENTER edit A gt add LOOP AM3440 A SNMP Setup Target Notify Target 1 2 Target Name target2 Domain UDP P Address LO ote Led Notify Ports 162 Tag group2 Timeout Ecs Retry sop Parameter group2 Status Active Parameter 1 2 Param Name group2 MP Model V1 Sec Model V1 Sec Level NoAuthNoPriv Sec Name public St
167. ey to return to previous menu gt gt The entire connection table can be viewed by paging through the line numbers using the space bar Each of the line numbers line index can be edited The procedure is as follows 1 Move the cursor to the index number Type in the line number followed by ENTER 2 Edit any of the entry by moving the cursor to that entry For numbers enter the new number followed by ENTER For option choices use TAB key to cycle through the available choices 6 4 11 3 Setup Specific to FR FR Protocol In the following setup will be for the FR FR protocol From the E1 T1 menu select Frame Relay for the Protocol Screen below illustrates that for the T1 interface Port System Setup SLOT D ATM FR T1 Port System Setup 22 50 06 07 15 2002 ARROW EYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS FRAME ESF Interface so Td CODE B8ZS Protocol Frame Relay YEL ON Channel Map AIS FRAMED 111111111111111111111111 INBAND OFF INTF LONG HAUL LBO 0 dB lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 130 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation SLOT ARROW EYS FRAME ODE RC AI IS AS DI Sa bit INTF JQ aa D ATM FR El CURSOR MOVE ON HDB3 ON ON FRAMED OFF OFF Sa4 75 Ohm TAB Port System Setup ROLL OPTIONS Interface Protocol Channel Map El 10 16 36 09 13 2002 Frame Relay og a E o a VELLA
168. f AM3440 and each Y BOX with RJ48C connectors support 1 for 1 protection function for 8 Quad E1 interfaces of AM3440 1 2 Physical Description Although it can be used as a desk top unit the Loop AM 3440 is designed for rack mounting Typically this unit is to be installed in a Central Office location and is available with choice of single 48Vdc 100W 48Vdc 150W 125Vdc 100W or 24Vdc 150W order two for redundancy Note If the user orders 125 Vdc power module the maximum number of particular cards allowed in slot 1 to 12 is Four 12 channel FXS Nine 12 channel Magneto Eleven 8 channel 2W 4W E amp M Six 8 channel OCU DP Two 4 channel G SHDSL 1 pair with line power Three 2 channel G SHDSL 2 pairs with line power Two 24 channel FXS The front of the unit can accept E1 T1 E1 T1 ATM Frame Relay FOM Router G SHDSL Dry Contact G 703 C37 94 TDMOE Data Bridge DTE V 35 V 36 X2 1 V 11 EIA530 RS449 and RS232 Conference E amp M Magneto FXS FXO and TS interface lines in 4 mini slots and 12 single slots Also there is a console port for connection to a VT 100 terminal The rear of the unit is blank except for DC fan connectors which will supply power to an external fan tray if warranted 1 3 Mini Slot plug in Cards AAA AA Application 4 channel E1 1 channel T1 Mini Quad E1 1 channel E1 ATM Frame Relay 1 channel T1 ATM Frame Relay 32 WAN port Router 64 WAN port Router Fiber Optical I
169. for this 1 N Multicast TSI function make sure the previous TSI map setting is cleared up LOOP AM3440 A Controller Setup 11 49 25 10 09 2009 System SNMP Setup Password TSI Map Setup Select a New TSI Map Copy a TSI Map to Another Clear a TSI Map Command Line nit New Card Clear Empty Slot Link Backup Function QDS1 1 1 Protection DS0 SNCP Setup PDH Ring Protection PDH Ring Diagnostic SNTP Setup TELNET SSH Setup Power Setup muzdguwogogcdnumutubiuotutu wm iod Poo dq de diode obo be d dpt OBERE e d VVVVVVVVVV VV VV VV VY lt lt Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command gt gt Press F from the above Controller Setup menu to clear the previous TSI map Then press ESC to return to the Controller Setup menu LOOP AM3440 A System Setup Clear 19 09 12 03 01 2001 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Clear TSI Map MAP 3 lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt 79 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Then press C from the above Controller Source Setup menu to set system map The meom NM following two screens show map settings for the right side s TSI Data Voice example TSI Below settings are for SlotA time slot 01 mapping to SlotB time slot 01 and SIotA time slot 01 mapping to Slot1 Port1 AM3440 time slot 01 LOOP AM3440 A System Setup S
170. gh the console port on the front panel Using single character commands and arrow keys the AM3440 including all of its ports can be configured and monitored through the use of a VT 100 terminal The single character commands are not case sensitive On each screen the available commands and the configurable fields are highlighted When a VT 100 terminal is connected to the CONSOLE of front panel make sure the button is up upon power up a main menu is shown The main menu consists of three groups of commands Display Log Setup and MISC Initially only Display and Access commands are available To enable Setup and MISC user has to log on using the O command after which the full screen is shown LOOP AM3440 A Controller Menu 17 14 50 08 03 2011 Serial Number i 172921 Redundant Controller Disabled Hardware Version Ver J Start Time t ATS19223 08 03 2011 Software Version V8 18 01 08 02 2011 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A DISPLAY SETUP C System Configuration S System Setup B Clock source Configuration M gt System Alarm Setup Q Alarm Queue Summary W Firmware Transfer Information Summary V Store Retrieve Configuration R Redundant CTRL Information K Clock source Setup P gt Performance Report T gt Bit Error Rate Test LOG MISC U gt Choose a Slot A Alarm Cut Off F Log Off SETUP MISC Menu X Clear Alarm Queue O gt Log On SETUP MISC Menu Y gt Con
171. gned are listed in Appendix D cc Alarm Type 63 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 4 Go to System Setup command path Main Menu gt S Controller Setup gt A System set up the network interface type LAN and WAN and key in the IP address LOOP AM3440 A System Setup SYSTEM 18 30 22 08 03 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS System Time Date 18 30 23 08 03 2011 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A Network NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer 4 LAN ON 010 003 023 010 255 255 000 000 Ethernet WAN ON 020 001 ad 002 255 255 000 099 HDLC 00000001 Inband Uses Slot 12 Note Slot 12 port 4 can nt use unframe mode mode CONSOLE port Baud Rate 38400 Data Length 8 Bits Stop Bit 1 Bit Parity NONE XON XOFF XOFF TSI map Clock TSI Function 1 1 Bidirection Clock Mode Normal Idle Signalling 1010 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Note NI Network Interface EN Enable DIS Disable LB Timer Loopback Timer The system will automatically assign the trap IP to LAN IP or WAN IP according to the trap system IP and Network interface you set up Below is the table of trap source IP condition under different LAN and WAN settings Option Setting Trap Source IP LAN EN WAN EN LAN Off Off No trap Off With IP On LAN IP Without IP WAN IP 0 0 0 0 On Off LAN IP On On LAN IP WAN Off Off No Trap Off O
172. he mismatch means the slot has replaced by another type of card which is different from registered card type When the word of mismatch show up press S command from the controller menu then enter I command in the screen of Controller Setup in order to init a new plug in card LOOP AM3440 A Information Summary 18 22 53 08 03 2011 Slot Card Interface Serial Software Version Registered Card A FE1 1200ohm N A V4 02 05 12 17 2010 FE1 B FEI unplugged e D FE1 120ohm N A V3 05 01 09 21 2007 FEl 1 FOM N A FOM 2 Quad El V3 test2 06 17 2011 FOM mismatch 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Quad El 010595 V3 test2 06 17 2011 Quad El 10 Quad El unplugged 11 12 lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 6 2 5 Redundant CTRL Information Controller Menu gt R Redundant CTRL Information This function displays the redundant CTRL info the serial number hardware and software version of the redundant CPU LOOP AM3440 A Redundant Board Information 09 47 31 10 09 2009 Serial Number 123542 Hardware Version Ver J Software Version V8 05 01 09 29 2009 If there is no redundant CTRL card press R will show Redundant Board does not exist LOOP AM3440 A Controller Menu 19 03 23 08 03 2011 Serial Number 172921 Redundant Controller Disabled Hardware Version Ver J Start Time 11 19 23 08 03 2011 Software Version V8 18 01 08 02 2011 Device Name LOOP AM3440
173. hour performance report by selecting register type and parameter The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk SLOT D ATM FR T1 Port 24 Hour Perf Report 17 18 33 07 21 2002 gt gt Select Register Type USER LINE gt gt Select Parameter ES UAS BES SES CSS LOFC AS EFS BPV ESF SLOT D ATM FR T1 Port 24 Hour Perf Report 17 18 44 07 21 2002 USER ES Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 345 seconds Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval O0 ES UAS BES SES CSS LOFC Current 15 Min Interval 00 0 0 0 0 0 Current 24 Hour Interval in VEGAS RA fume AA AGA IRA USER ES Last 96 15 Min Interval 01 08 gt lt lt TAB key to show Statistics Report gt gt lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt 112 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation SLOT D ATM FR T1 Port 24 Hour Stat Report 17 18 48 07 21 2002 USER SES Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 345 seconds Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval O0 SES SUAS SBES SSES CSS SLOFC Current 15 Min 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Current 24 Hour Possi pera asd eran C nes USER SES Last 96 15 Min Interval 01 08 gt lt lt TAB key to show Performance Report gt gt lt lt ESC key to return to previous
174. in card ERROR34 Not enough channels ERROR35 Slot need to download firmware ERROR36 Time slot conflict ERROR37 Reserved for future use ERROR38 Reserved for future use ERROR39 Reserved for future use ERROR40 Reserved for future use ERROR41 Reserved for future use 42 Chapter 4 Maintenance 4 Maintenance 4 1 Self Test When Loop AM is powered up a complete self test routine is run to check all I O ports read write memory and data paths to validate system integrity 4 2 Diagnostics Diagnostics for AM3440 covers Loopback and Test Pattern Generally the Loopback functions might be very in different type of plug in cards Please go to individual plug in card manual for detail info 4 3 Near End Loopback The near end loopbacks such as local loopback line loopback payload loopback DTE loopback are activated by the AM3440 The loopbacks are at the near end facility NOTE Deactivate the near end loopbacks from the terminal depending on where it was activated 4 4 Far End Loopback Far end loopbacks remote line loopback remote payload loopback remote channel loopback and DTE loopback can be activated by the local AM3440 to cause a remote loopback commands to the far end facility 4 5 Test Pattern To test the DS1 line four test patterns are available to determine faults such as deficient clock recovery fault ALBO level recovery inadequate
175. indicates the occupied timeslot number for the DSO SNCP circuit To create more DS0 SNCP circuits on other timeslots go to the TSI Map Setup command path Main Menu gt S System Setup gt C TSI Map Setup and choose other timeslots for DSO SNCP When alarms LOS LOF and AIS INS occur in the primary slot the working timeslot may Switch from the primary to the secondary slot If you wish the system to switch the working timeslot from secondary back to primary once the primary slot is repaired select revertible for Switch mode If not choose Non revertible After all setup procedures are done select Yes to confirm with the settings The same setup procedure should be applied to Device B Note P Protected W Working S Standby When the protected interface is a data card 185 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup Below is a sample screen of DSO SNCP setup with a protected data interface E1 card A DSO SNCP circuit is created on timeslot 1 LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Creation 14 38 39 10 15 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Protection Group Creation Using map 1 Total DSO SNCP 1 Protected Slot D E1 S E E EEEE EE E Port NON CAS TES OL Count 01 Primary SLOLS 7 3E1 M ec A a ACER RR CR hk ERS Port P1 NON CAS Protection Delay 00 TS OL Upstream Send AIS On Secondary Slot 8 3E1 A O NO Port Pl NON CAS Protection Delay 00 VIO ol Upstream Send AIS On Switch Mode Non reve
176. ine e eed e e d ante 109 6 4 1 2 ATM Frame Relay E1 tnit eti oi edd i d decl 111 6 4 2 24 Hour Performance Report ntn et utere anta 112 6 4 2 1 ATM Erame Relay T idi cipere EIE EE pee E DR ERE ERBEN pede ege dod 112 6 4 2 2 ATM Frame Relay E41 up yen EE ie cette dda 113 6 4 3 Port StatisllCS t e t o ei uie ides ada tes ceca A dr ads 114 6 4 3 1 TVET Line Availability 3 3 Et n REOR Ene RC PEE rbd dade 114 6 4 3 2 Frame Relay stalistiCS nin n peer de Pro S ROO PEDI CORO oe ens 115 6 4 3 3 ATM Stats S tsa LE 116 6 4 4 UnitiConfiguratiOn 2 1 eet RE Ero PUE ee et A AETA 116 6 4 4 1 System Setup ATM FR TA sas eee teen eterne rente hannes 116 6 4 4 2 System Set p ATM FRE lion aid 117 6 4 5 Alarm Elistory n diee Eo A e RUE d DEO ETHER EE EO ER ped 117 6 4 5 1 Alarm History FR to ATM erre een ennemis 117 6 4 5 2 Alarm History FR to ER Rohre t a 118 6 4 6 Port Status ctio o cuerda ete Dad Sead ct ates peat Bot ead atta reas his 118 6 4 6 1 TPT ETS Status tia oed aed teret 118 6 4 6 2 Frame Relay Status i satire Siesta de ts Nas Sateen eit es aei 119 6 4 6 3 ATM Status ata pide erate ta 120 6 4 7 Alarm QUEUS asas sia rt e it tees Ret Aral ad O RR a a as he 121 6 4 8 Loopback Testers ee te e o Dont OO tases RO NE Poe Ra 121 6 4 8 1 ATM Frame Relay T T nre i ro eo ere e Ep d teat 121 6 4 8 2 ATM Frame Relay E Tafe doeet eo ete E dier aerus 122 6 4 9 Alarm S SL
177. ion or Yellow Alarm 21 AIS Alarm Indication Signal 22 LOS Loss of Signal 23 LOF Loss of Frame 24 BPV Bipolar Violation 25 ES Error Second 26 ii FE UAS Unavailable Second 27 CSS Control Slip Second 28 ATM LOS Loss of Signal 29 ATM AIS Alarm Indication Signal 30 ATM RDI ATM Remote Defect Indication 31 ATM LOC ATM Loss of Continuity 32 FR LKD Frame Relay Link Down 33 3 3 2 Reports For DS1 line receiver AM3440 has three sets of performance registers These are line user and far end The line performance register tracks the DS1 line receiver performance status The user performance register tracks the DS1 line receiver as well but user may clear at any time The far end performance register tracks the far end DS1 receiver status The performance parameters are listed in Table below User performance register have an additional parameter CSS controlled slip second Each performance parameter has ninety six sets of registers to record 24 hours history in 15 minute intervals Table 3 6 Performance Parameter List Performance Description Definition Definition Parameter 2 Frame Multiframe 16 Frame Multiframe ES Error Second BPV gt 1 OOF gt 1 or CRC6 ERROR gt 1 OOF CS gt 1 gt 1 or CS gt 1 BES Bursty Error 1 lt BPV lt 2048 1 lt CRC6 lt 860 Second SES Severe Error BPV gt 2048 or OOF gt CRC6 gt 860 or OOF gt 1 Second 1 Degraded Minute BPV gt 123 CRC6 gt 47 LOFC Loss Of Frame OOF for 2 5 0 5 sec
178. irect modem or VT 100 terminal connection use a null modem cable to connect the CONSOLE port on the front panel NOTE When AM3440 is plugged with two CPU cards both of these two CPU cards can be primary master or redundant slave which only depends on which CPU card completes boot up first after powering on the main unit User can tell which CPU card is primary or redundant from the status of CPU card s ACTIVE led If ACTIVE led is flashing green the CPU card is primary When one CPU fails the other becomes master and remains master even when the failed is replaced 2 3 1 Chassis Grounding Chapter 2 Installation The chassis ground screw is located in the right hand side of the rear panel QD0000000000 000000000000 0000000000000 0000000000000 O00C000 00 0000 OL DA 000000404 ee Grounding QDO DOTT DOT DO TOC DOCA DLE C CO ODODOCTO ROC DC OC OCC 1000000000000 DO DORORORO COD OC OC 000000000 000000100 000 Ol 00 000 Ol 00 SDONODODONODOD0000000000000000 0 ODOCOLOLOLODODOOOQOOLOLOLOLOLON 0 000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000 000000 Figure 2 1 Ground Screw Location When attaching a ground wire to the chassis ground screw please follow these instructions Use copper grounding conductors of 18 AWG Conductors should not be of dissimilar metals The bare conductors should be coated with anti oxidant before crimp connections are made Any unplated connection surfaces connectors
179. is is accomplished through the TSI screen Note Please refer to Appendix B Inband Management for detail 41 Chapter 3 Operation Table 3 9 Error Message Table The error messages defined here should be corresponded to the error codes Error Code Error Description ERRORO1 A loopback is in effect ERRORO2 LCD operation is locked ERRORO3 Channel is already in use ERRORO4 can t be in TTM if MCLK DTE ERRORO5 DTEn is in TTM or speed is O ERRORO6 Line unsync ERRORO7 No channel is assigned ERRORO08 Please select speed first ERRORO9 A test is in progress ERROR10 DTE loopback is in progress ERROR11 Please reduce speed first ERROR12 Illegal Date Time format ERROR13 the DTE1 channel should be B2 ERROR14 the DTE1 channel should be B1 B2 ERROR15 the DTE1 channel should be B1 ERROR16 the DTE1 channel should be B1 B2 ERROR17 Remote doesn t have this function ERROR18 Remote unit rejected this request ERROR19 Remote unit didn t respond ERROR20 Remote DTE1 TTM should be off ERROR21 the DTE1 channel should be IDLE ERROR22 the DTE1 is not installed ERROR23 undefined response ERROR24 the unit didn t response ERROR25 speed can t be zero if MCLK DTEn ERROR26 the unit is not installed ERROR27 ESF or ESF amp T1 403 mode is required ERROR28 ESF amp T1 403 mode is required ERROR29 E1 CRC and FDL must set to be on ERROR30 LLB or LOCAL LOOPBACK activated ERROR31 EOC is not ready ERROR32 Current slot is not HDSL plug in card ERROR33 Current slot is not DTE plug
180. is to copy the TSI map from one to another LOOP AM3440 A System Setup Copy ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu Copy TSI Map from MAP 1 to MAP 2 the 18 39 44 08 03 2011 n Press D to active gt gt 69 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 7 7 Clear a TSI Map Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt F Clear a TSI Map This function is to clear the selected TSI map setting LOOP AM3440 A System Setup Clear 19 09 12 03 01 2001 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Clear TSI Map MAP 1 lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt 6 2 7 8 Command Line Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt L Command Line This function is for FAE support use Press then press ENTER the system will list all available commands Then key in a desired command to get the detail description To return to the Controller Setup menu press q Press get help or QUIT return 18 37 48 Aug 01 11 Insert 18 36 54 Aug 01 11 gt gt Available Commands quit help passcode ether arp ping fbank fboot upgrade syslog auto save inactive pdh spring capture fae upload resume txtcfg 18 37 03 Aug 01 11 gt gt help Commands Support Quit LAA SS gt Quit command support help AA SAA gt This help message ether status clear Display Clear ethernet status drp
181. ivity and SSH Secure Shell to allow user access to the Loop AM controller from any workstation in the network SSH Secure Shell is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged over a secure channel between two computers Encryption provides confidentiality and integrity of data SSH uses public key cryptography to authenticate the remote computer and allow the remote computer to authenticate the user if necessary There are two interfaces for Telnet function one is Ethernet port and the other is in band port in band management To use Ethernet interface use Ethernet RJ45 port at back panel to connect with Ethernet network directly Ethernet and in band port cannot be used at the same time To use the Telnet function make sure IP Address and Interface parameters are matched Once the IP parameters are set users can verify that the AM3440 is operating properly by using the ping command to check for a response from AM3440 Sping 192 1 100 45 192 1 100 45 is active The Telnet utility simulates VT 100 to connect with the AM3440 controller The controller main menu of terminal screen described at Chapter 6 will be displayed after Telnet connection is established Refer to Chapter 6 to manage AM3440 controller AM3440 controller can maintain 4 Telnet connections simultaneously but only one to log on at one time 3 6 Embedded SNMP Agent The embedded SNMP agent for AM3440 offers standard RFC 1213 MIB ll and RFC 1406 DS1 MIB as well a
182. lock Status NORMAL Ext Clock Type El lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt The clocks on the SLAVE units will be set up as shown in the screen below LOOP AM3440 A System Setup CLOCK SSM Mode 15 19 39 03 24 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS First Clock Source SLOT 1 P1 Second Clock Source SLOT 1 P2 Third Clock Source NONE Current Clock FIRST CLK Clock Status NORMAL lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 177 Chapter 12 Appendix F Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring T1 5 FDL Facilities Data Link On the Port System Setup screen set the FDL must be set at FDL and FRAME must be ESF amp 11 403 for all ports in the ring ie Slave unit ports and Master unit ports This setting is highlighted on the sample setup screen below SLOT 5 Quad T1 PORT 1 Port System Setup 10 35 03 03 06 2007 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS FRAME ESF T1 403 CODE B8ZS YEL ON AIS FRAMED CAS OFF SIGNALLI TRANS CGA NORM OOS BUSY INBAND OFF IDLE FF INTF LONG HAUL LBO 0 dB FDL FDL Protected DISABLE Master lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 6 TSI Function The TSI function for all the AM3440 A devices must be set at 1 N Multicast This setting is highlighted on the sample setup screen below LOOP AM3440 A System S
183. m Setup 10 27 05 10 27 2004 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS TYPE THRESHOLD ALARM RAI MAJOR AIS MAJOR LOS MAJOR LOF MAJOR BPV 10E 5 MAJOR ES 001 MAJOR UAS 001 MAJOR CSS 001 MAJOR lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 6 5 12 Unit Clear Alarm Queue amp History Under Port Menu press X to clear alarm queue and history then press Y or N to confirm it SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port Menu 102321233 10729 7 2004 Version SW S1 CO 10 20 2004 DISPLAY SETUP 1 Unit 1 Hour Perf Report L gt Unit Loopback Setup 2 gt Unit 24 Hour Perf Report S gt Unit System Setup A gt Unit Line Availability K gt Unit Clear Performance Data C gt Unit Configuration M Unit Alarm Setup gt Unit Status X gt Unit Clear Alarm Queue amp History H gt Unit Alarm History D gt Unit Upgrade Firmware Q gt Unit Alarm Queue LOG MISC U gt Choose Other Slot Y gt Unit Load Default Config P gt Choose Port Z Unit Reset F gt Log Off SETUP MISC Menu O gt Log On SETUP MISC Menu E gt Return to Controller Main Menu gt gt Clear alarm queue of SLOT A are you sure Y N 143 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 5 13 Unit Upgrade Firmware Press D to download firmware then the screen will show as below Use arrow keys to move the cursor and SPACE key to edit LOOP AM3440 A Download Firmwa
184. menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt 6 4 2 2 ATM Frame Relay E1 Press 2 from the port menu the following screen will show To view ATM FR E1 port 24 hour performance report by selecting register type The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk SLOT D ATM FR El Port 24 Hour Perf Report 16 30 29 07 24 2002 USER ES Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 46 seconds Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval O0 ES UAS BES SES DM CSS Current 15 Min Interval e 0 46 0 0 0 46 Current 24 Hour Interval SERA AA CAES AA SSSR CNA USER ES Last 96 15 Min Interval lt lt TAB key to show Statistics Report gt gt lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt 113 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation SLOT D ATM FR El Port 24 Hour Stat Report 1673033 07 24 2002 USER SES Valid Seconds in Current 15 Min Interval 46 seconds Valid 15 Min Intervals in Current 24 Hour Interval O0 SES SUAS SBES SSES SDM CSS Current 15 Min 0 0000 100 00 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 100 00 Current 24 Hour a a Se Sie oe eS SS eee Eres USER SES Last 96 15 Min Interval 01 08 gt lt lt TAB key to show Performance Report gt gt lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt 6 4 3 Port Statistics Press A from the port me
185. meslots Full means all of the timeslots Select means to select the timeslot in the following Test Map column Test Map available for setup only when the user chooses Select for Test Channel Move the cursor to select the test channel The screen will show the channel number you select Test Map i iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii CH 01 Test Direction BERT direction that determines the testing path Choose To Line to make BERT goes straight from the testing timeslot to the selected interface Choose To Mapped to make BERT goes from the testing timeslot to the cross connect than to the mapped interface Period Period is the testing time duration for the BERT diagnosis You can set up the testing time limit sec by yourself The default rate is 000000 and will make the BERT diagnosis goes on forever Test Enable After you have set all the parameters mentioned above choose Enable to activate the BERT test After you enable the BERT test the system will show the current testing status on the screen as below You can also inject an error to the BERT pattern using the right arrow key If the sent out pattern is the same with the received pattern the channel being diagnosed is in normal condition Pattern 2exp20 1 SYNC Elapsed Second 77 Bit Error 220 BER 0 0 Error Seconds 0 ESR 0 0 SES gt 00 SESR 0 0 Pattern 2exp20 1
186. n ont iE ede eo PRO ate Ei e nen did eer ug 154 9 2 1 Connecting the Y Box to the AM 3440 Shelf sss ene 154 9 2 2 Quad ET card Locations isa de EEE NAT a tet xcti gelo 156 9 2 3 Setting up a VT 100 Monitor eene emere nennen nennen nnn 156 9 2 4 Step by Step Quad E1 Plug in card Circuit Protection Setup 156 9 3 Setting up Line Protection o ecran Y e DO Yee de ER RR dete Geen 157 9 3 1 Step by Step Quad E1 Card Line Protection Setup 158 10 Appendix D Loop AM 3440 A Alarm Trap Information ssssssssssssseeee 161 10 1 RN 161 10 2 ccAlarmModel Plug in card model type enm emm memnnnn nnns 162 10 3 ccAlarmolot Slot Index rio rf Aree edP e pa rt RIDERE I ire a 163 10 4 ccAlarmbPort Portindex iine Reg eder I ae RD eU REM ERE RE 163 10 5 ccAlarmType lt 20 Controller alaiena aa aa eene eene eene nennen 163 10 6 ccAlamType Unit AAN eaa a ede fae i e e reel DIRE 164 10 7 Alarm Settp Indication sas rr eet ret ent I ep Le Ee e epu ada 169 11 Appendix E Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring 170 11 1 OVetVIQW ih Sorte ates rete fitta erdt cet A E a foedere ata 170 11 2 Setup Instructions 2 2 re coeno Se Eee donata E Mea Ed o Sa ote RS da 171 12 Appendix F Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring T1 seee 176 12 1 OVERVIEW nr ii A A ER 176 12 2 Setup InStructlons 3 0 5 er tt a Aa ada 177 13 3ET DSO0 SNG
187. n WAN IP On Off With IP WAN IP Without IP LAN IP 0 0 0 0 On On WAN IP Option Trap System IP option on VT Trap IP Trap and Community screen Setting NI Network Interface option on System Setup screen 64 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation V3 User Based Security Model Setup Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt S SNMP Setup gt C V3 User Based Security Model Setup For SNMPv3 user must setup USM and VACM For USM it is used to setup user authentication and privacy Press C to setup V3 User Based Security Model There are 12 digit numbers for Engine ID The user s name is loopmd5 and loopsha the password is loop1234 LOOP AM3440 A SNMP Setup USM 11 02 32 12 08 2006 My Engine E Engine ID 00000337000000007F000001 Boots ee Total User 6 User 01 2 2 i Engine ID 00000337000000007F000001 User Name loopmd5 Auth Protocol MD5 Auth Key CD3644D218EB247E3697434F7F2B3E15 Priv Protocol DES Priv Key CD3644D218bEB247E3697434F7F2B3E15 Status Active Storage NonVolatile lt lt ESC gt return to previous menu LEFT RIGHT gt prev next user F gt find user gt gt lt lt E gt edit engine ENTER gt edit user C gt clone user A gt add user D gt delete gt gt 65 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation If you press Enter an edit screen will appear The user must enter a password A delay will occur because of transfer time to record the key
188. nar Mee PERI ep eee 68 6 2 7 5 Select a New TSI Map iinne mnan emeret treten snnt ntes sensns 69 6 2 7 6 Copy a TSI Map to another sss eene 69 6 2 7 7 Clear a Sli Map rea erac Paid ete etuer ane eerie esu des 70 6 2 7 8 Command Line raven ect mette ee tie e P Fc EE ei Pee aa erated 70 6 2 7 9 Init New Gard deett ITO ere de agree a eat donee 71 6 2 7 10 Clear Empty Slot casos isla i n na ETUR 72 6 2 7 11 Fink BACKUP e285 oon rd pO ERIS mda RR an 73 6 2 7 12 QDS 111 Protection ioi cher arte tn saad AD ICE ES FERRARI SR ada APENA 73 6 2 7 13 DSO SNC P Setup x2 rt tre gaa rare ee entr EU 73 6 2 7 14 PDE Ring Protection ceto ttr te rage Re eoa re BERTA RS Fin angue eaa iia 74 6 2 7 15 PDH Ring DIaghoStlic 7 tec ltda 75 6 2 7 16 SINT Pr Ours Se cenicienta acia Ru Bea pet uten met ftem Rae E tas AU 75 6 2 7 17 TELNE TESS Hs Setup iL de atraer t ett Rupe studs Eee trad 76 6 2 7 18 Power Setup dint detect e mp nei catten BRs Da quan dado sens EE 77 6 2 7 19 Multicast Mapping Procedure ccccceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeceeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeenieeeeeeeeetees 17 6 2 8 System Alarm Setup c tenis E arto dide Dite pna 83 6 2 9 Firmware Transfer e ete reb Pent t nei md esie 84 6 2 9 1 Download Mainboard Firmware ssssssssssssseeeeeneneeene nnn 85 6 2 9 2 Application of upload download configuration 86 6 2 9 3 Copy Firmware to Redundant iara 87
189. nc If not then AM3440 has failed Then perform a BERT test towards the line If this fails then AM3440 has failed For the DTE interfaces a loopback plug must be used in concert with a far end AM3440 if such a terminal is available then a PRBS test will determine if that DTE interface is at fault Note that if a far end terminal is available the first test should be a local line loopback to see if the line is good If tests with loopback plug all pass then the problem is probably elsewhere 4 6 4 Using Bert Test Set If a BERT bit error rate test set and another AM3440 are available such as the Fireberd 6000 then a comprehensive suite of test are available to examine the health of the Loop AM If another AM3440 is not available use of the loopback plugs would provide some of the tests otherwise possible With a BERT each of the ports of the AM3440 can be tested individually The user must configure the BERT in the exact way the AM3440 is configured This is easily done by comparing each of the options one by one After checking that the configuration matches if any one of the ports fails then AM3440 has failed 44 Chapter 5 Front Panel Operation 5 Front Panel Operation 5 1 Refer to AM3440 A LCD separate Manual For detail of AM3440 A LCD chapter please see AM3440 A LCD separate Manual 45 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 Terminal Operation AM3440 provides comprehensive report and enhanced configuration capability throu
190. nect it to the AM 3440 as shown in Figure 9 2 below For illustration purposes only Port 9 is protected in this sample diagram To protect other ports you must connect them in a similar manner Loop W A LINEJB A LINE 10 B A LINE 11 B A 14 B LINE 15 B A LINE 1 ME UII pit id LIL Lait it tJ A LINE1 B A LINE2B A Lt B A LINE4 B A LINES E6 B LINE7 B A LINE Figure 9 2 Connection for AM3440 and Y BOX with RJ48C connectors NOTE Cable connections between the RJ 48C connectors on the Y Box and RJ48C connectors on Chapter 9 Appendix C QDS1 1 1 Protection 9 2 2 Quad E1 card Location In our sample setup we installed a Quad E1 card in Slot 9 We will use it as a Master It will be the working line We also installed a Quad E1 card in Slot 10 It will be used as a Slave and will perform the protection function 9 2 3 Setting up a VT 100 Monitor Use a DB9 cable to connect the front Console Port of the Loop Am 3440 to either COM Port 1 or COM Port 2 of the PC you are using as a VT 100 monitor It doesn t matter which Com Port you connect to NOTE Many newer PCs use USB Ports If your computer has a USB port rather than COM ports you will need to purchase a commercially available PC USB to DB9 conversion cable These cables come with software which when loaded in a PC will allow you to send keyboard commands through the PC s USB Port to the DB9 Console Port of
191. ng Trace route Rate limit 8 LAN ports Max 64 WAN ports Each WAN port has data rate n x 64K bps 1x n x32 x 8Mbps for total of all 64 WAN ports 10 100 BaseT x 8 RJ45 RIP I RIP Il OSPF Static PPP IPCP BCP MLPPP HDLC Frame Relay and Cisco compatible HDLC NAT NAPT DHCP Ping Trace route Rate limit Terminal Server Interface Connecotr Ports Data Rate Layer 2 Protocol of RS232 Async One DB 44 converseion cable to one DB 9 and two DB 25 connecotrs One Async RS232 port two Async Sync RS232 ports The two Async Sync ports can be configured independently as Asynchronous or Synchronous Async 1 2kbps 2 4kbps 4 8kbps 9 6kbps 19 2kbps 38 4kbps Sync 64 kbps Raw data SLIP Layer 2 Protocol of RS232 Sync PPP Terminal Server Function Router Function Supports Telnet RIP RIP II Static Route Fiber Optical Interface 1FOM A Interface Source Wavelength 50 Km reach MLM Laser Line Code Scrambled NRZ 1310 50 nm 1550 40 nm Detector Type PIN FET Protection Optional 1 1 APS Optical Fiber Interface Characteristics Optical Module Fiber Direction Wavelength nm Connector Distance km Single Dual uni direction 1310 SC Subscriber Connector 30 1310 SC Subscriber Connector 50 1310 FC Fiber Connector 30 1550 SC Subscriber Connector 20 1550 SC Subscriber Connector 100 Single Single bi direction master 1310 1550 SC Subscriber Connector 30 Single bi direction sl
192. ng displays the egress port type E1 or T1 The Protocol setting allows the user to specify the protocol on the line ATM or Frame Relay The Channel Map with 31 time slot positions specifies the type of traffic A 1 specifies presence of layer 2 traffic in that time slot and an i indicates an idle time slot For ATM traffic this setting cannot be modified All of the E1 line settings Frame Code CRC and others must match that of the ATM network settings NOTE Although the following illustrations are for the E1 interface the procedure for the T1 interface are similar except for the 24 available time slots for T1 compared to 30 for E1 125 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 4 11 2 System Specific to ATM Protocol In the following further setup will be for the ATM protocol For Frame Relay protocol see later sections Port System Setup SLOT D ATM FR T1 Port System Setup 17 35 29 03 23 2002 ARROW EYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS FRAME ESF Interface T A CODE B8ZS Protocol ATM YEL ON Channel Map AIS FRAMED AAA ATA AAA Ea ss Es Pa E INBAND OFF INTF LONG HAUL LBO 0 dB lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt SLOT D ATM FR El Port System Setup 10 24 07 09 13 2002 D Il w Il ARROW EYS CURSOR MOVE T ROLL OPTIONS FRAME ON Interface EL CODE HDB3 Protocol ATM CRC ON Channel Map RAI ON ffs e AAA A AA
193. nsmit D A gain 0 6dB receive A D gain 6 0 6dB gt 25dB with 1004 Hz OdBm input Max 65 dBmOp Side A exchange side Side B carrier side Jumper selectable Type P Jumper enable Master standard Jumper selectable 4 wire Type 1 Type 4 and Type 5 Jumper selectable Single rainging for 5 sec only 2 sec on 4 sec off for 1 min or 1 sec on 2 sec off for 30 sec programmable Voice Card QFXS QFXO Connector Alarm Conditioning Encoding AC impedance Longitudinal Conversion Loss Loss Adjustment Signal Distorition Frequency Response FXS Loop Feed FXS Ringing FXO Ringing REN Metering Pulse Signaling Inband Singaling Tone Chapter 1 Product Description Four RJ11 CGA busy after 2 5 seconds of LOS LOF A law or u law user selectable per card Balanced 600 or 900 ohms user selectable per card gt 46dB 0 3 6 or 9 dB transmit amp receive user selectable per card gt 25dB with 1004 Hz OdBm input 0 25 to 1 dB from 300 to 3400 Hz Nominal 48 Vdc with 25mA current limit per port 1 REN at 5000 meters per port 20 Hz other frequencies manufacture option 16 7 Hz 25 Hz 50 Hz 76 Vrms sine wave User selectable ring cadence per card for PLAR function 2 sec on 4 sec off or 1 sec on 2 sec off Ringing REN 0 5B AC Detectable Ringing 25 Vrms Loop Resistance lt 1800 Q DC impedance ON HOOK gt 1MQ DC impedance OFF HOOK 235 O 25mA feed 90 Q 100mA fee
194. nterface 3 channel Terminal Server 1 channel DTE 1X 21 1V 35 1RS232 or 1EIA530 YV V4 Nvv vv y vr gt gt Single Slot plug in Cads Chapter 1 Product Description LoopView SNMP Manager Dual slot plug in cards gt 6 6 gt 6 6 p 24 p 24 gt 2 4 channel X 21 V 11 channel V 35 channel V 36 channel EIA530 RS 449 channel FXS channel FXO channel G SHDSL w line power channel G SHDSL w line power channel E1 channel E1 channel T1 4 4 8 2 4 8 8 8 8 channel OCU DP channel G SHDSL w o line power channel G SHDSL w o line power channel G 703 64 Kbps channel Dry Contact VO channel Dry Contact I O type B channel 2 W 4 WE amp M channel FXS channel FXO channel Magneto channel C 37 94 channel C37 94 channel RS232 with X 50 subrate 1 4 8 8 LAN port 64 WAN port Router B Conference card TDMoE 8 Data Bridge 1FOM A Note 1 Only CHAJ Unit applicable ta DSO SNCP function Figure 1 1 Loop AM 3440 Application Illustration 1 of 2 Quad Ei card AM 3440 Y BOX E1 Line Quad E1 card Figure 1 2 Loop AM 3440 with Y BOX 2 of 2 N Chapter 1 Product Description 1 4 Specifications for AM3440 Network Line Interface T1 Line Rate 1 544 Mbps 32ppm Output Signal Line Code AMI or B8ZS Framing Input Signal DSX 1 0 dB to 30 dB w ALBO Connector Network Line Interface E1 Line Rate 2 048
195. nu gt S System Setup gt C TSI Map Setup Description This function is to do the TSI Map Setup Select the desired slot and port number for the mapping target Next select the starting timeslot number T S and the timeslot amount T S and data or voice d v for target Also select the desired slot port and starting timeslot number T S for the mapping source After configuration select Yes for confirmation Note More detail please see TSI Map Setup in Chapter 6 148 Chapter 8 Appendix B Inband Management 8 Appendix B Inband Management 8 1 Introduction The advantage of Inband Management is that saves money because management is through the line itself and a separate line is not needed for management functions The disadvantage is that if you do anything to break the management channel you cannot get it back In Inband Management the management function is inserted into the working line Using the Router card management of a local as well as one or more remote Loop products The diagram below illustrates inband application The user can use router card to share one or more 64 Kbps time slot for SNMP management Each 64 Kbps time slot has enough bandwidth to manage four AM3440 Thus up to four AM3440 can share a single 64 Kbps bandwidth for SNMP management Data Router card ofthe AM3440 A rms Time slot Inband Management allows Inband Management through the network
196. nu the screen will show as below To view the statistics of ATM FR port by selecting statistics type The current selection will be highlighted by an asterisk SLOT D ATM FR El Port Statistics 17 23 15 07 21 2002 gt gt Select Statistics Type T1 El Line FR Statistics ATM Statistics 6 4 31 T1 E1 Line Availability SLOT D ATM FR El Port Line Availability 17 23 19 07 21 2002 Line Availability during Last 24 Hour Valid Seconds 621 seconds Available Seconds 621 seconds Unavailable Seconds 0 seconds Line Availability t 100 0 3 lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE key to refresh gt gt 114 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 4 3 2 Frame Relay Statistics SLOT D ATM FR El Channel 1 PVC Number 1 lt lt Input PVC 0 for Port Frame Relay Statistics Total PVC pl 17 233233 04 2172002 channel summary or ESC to previous menu gt gt SLOT D ATM FR El Channel 1 PVC H EN DLCI 100 Received Bytes Frames Discards Drops Channel 1 PVC Number 1 lt lt ESC key to return Port Frame Relay Statistics O O Total PVC Transmitted Bytes Frames Discards Drops 1 to previous menu SPACE key to a leo oo refresh gt gt 17 23 33 07 21 2002 115 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 4 3 3 ATM Statistics SLOT D ATM FR El Port ATM Statistics 17 23 53 0
197. off or 2 sec on 4 sec off L1 and L2 Tip and Ring L1 and GND Tip and GND Magneto MRD Ringing across Tip and Ring or Tip and Ground Programable Signaling is carried transparently by the digitizing process Use Magneto card default setting for communications between magneto telephones Use Magneto card PLAR mode setting for communications between a magneto telephone and a regular telephone Conference Card Chapter 1 Product Description RS232 Interface Data Port ASYNC Data Rate SYNC Connector FXS Voice Interface Connector Encoding Longitudinal Conversion Loss Cross Talk Measure Gain Adjustment Signal Distortion Idle Channel Noise Loop Resistance FXS Loop Feed FXS Ringing Signaling E amp M Voice Interface Connector Encoding Impedance Longitudinal Conversion Loss Gain Adjustment Signal Distortion Idle Channel Noise Carrier Connection Phone line power 12V Operation mode Wire Mode Signaling Type EM Ringing 2 ports per card 300 600 1 2K 2 4K 4 8K 9 6K 19 2K not supported Two DB9 DCE female Two RJ11 G 723 gt 46dB Max 70dBmO transmit D A gain 0 6dB receive A D gain 6 0 6dB gt 25dB with 1004 Hz OdBm input Max 65 dBm0p Max 1800 ohm Normal 48 Vdc with 25mA current limit 2 REN 20Hz 76 Vrms 2 sec on 4 sec off for 1 min or 1 sec on 2 sec off for 30 sec programmable Loop Start DTMF Two RJ45 G 723 Balanced 600 ohms gt 46dB tra
198. om the index Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS qd C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non revertible 194 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup To delete the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether key in the first index number in the from column and the last index number in the to column In the example below we key in Delete index from 1 to 2 which means to delete index 1 and 2 altogether Then press Enter and select Yes for confirm to do Delete Index From 1 To2 X Confirm To Do Yes Both SNCP circuits for index 1 and 2 will be cleared LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Information 16 19 38 10 15 2010 DSO SNCP ENABLE Total DSO SNCP 2 Index Protected Primary Secondary d v Mode Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS ESC return SPACE next page D delete F force switch M change mode L lock on working P lock on primary S lock on secondary U unlock Note The by pass XC in intermediate unit should be deleted 195 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup e Force Switch Switch the working timeslot between the primary working and the secondary stand by Press F on the screen of DS0 SNCP information A prompt message will ask you which SNCP circuit you would like to switch the working timeslot Key in the desired circuit s index number Then press ENTER and choose Yes for Confirm to do
199. or the detail operation 2 4 2 Replacement of Plug in card When a plug in card is removed and replaced with a plug in card of a different type default configuration is assigned to the new plug in card The user must set the configuration for each change of plug in card type If the same type plug in card is inserted depending on plug in card type 24 Chapter 2 Installation Table 2 9 V 35 DB25 DTE Port Pin Definition Pin Number Signal Transmit Data DTE DTE Clear To Send DCE Data Set Ready DCE DCE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DCE Remote Loopback DTE DCE Ero We EN 2 HRS INE gue NUM p e A L ug s GR 10 po dE pa EE AAA 18 16 HEN ONE RE uem 19 20 S 398 m mim 1 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 5 2 25 Chapter 2 Installation Table 2 10 V 36 ElA530 DB25 DTE Port Pin Definition 1 Cableshied 6 DataSetReady CE 7 SignalGround 8 Data Carrier Detect DCE y Receive Clock Retum DCE Table 2 11 X 21 V 11 and DB15 DTE Port Pin Definition 1 j CabeSheld e Transmit Data Return Unassigned 4 po o 6 O ETB O ESA 26 Chapter 2 Installation Table 2 12 RS232 DB25 DTE Port Pin Definition 14 CableShied 6 DataSetReady DCE oo 7 SignalGrownd_ 8 Data Carrier Detect DCE 9 Unassigned 0 10 Unassigned
200. ore Retrieve Configuration 16 45 31 02 20 2004 RETRIEVE XXXX gt gt Select STORE gt gt Enter password Then press ENTER from the above screen the configuration is retrieved LOOP AM3440 A Store Retrieve Configuration 16 45 31 02 20 2004 gt gt Select STORE RETRIEVE gt Retrieving 94 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 11 Clock Source Setup B For Normal Clock Mode Under the Controller Setup menu press A to get in System Setup SYSTEM menu as below screen shows Use arrow keys to move the cursor at Clock Mode item and TAB key to choose Normal option LOOP AM3440 A System Setup SYSTEM 09 39 08 08 18 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS System Time Date 09 39 08 08 18 2010 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A Network NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer LAN ON 010 003 023 010 255 255 000 000 Ethernet WAN OFF 020 001 001 002 255 255 000 000 HDLC 00000001 Gateway Interface LAN Gateway IPAddr 000 000 000 000 nband Uses Slot D Note Slot D port 4 can t use unframe mode CONSOLE port Baud Rate 38400 Data Length 8 Bits Stop Bit l Bit Parity NONE XON XOFF XOFF TSI map Clock TSI Function 1 1 Bidirection Clock Mode Normal dle Signalling 1010 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Press ESC key from the above screen Then press Y to confirm the new setting or N to abort
201. other card etc To configure the QDS1 1 1 Protection function in the follow procedure 1 Select the QDS1 1 1 Protection function in Controller Menu S System Setup Q QDS1 1 1 Protection 2 Set TSI Map in Controller Menu gt S System Setup C TSI Map Setup Note You MUST set the protection first and then set the TSI map 9 2 Setting up Circuit Protection 9 2 1 Connecting the Y Box to the AM 3440 Shelf There are two Y Box types available for the AM 3440 One has BNC connectors and can handle up to 4 lines The other has RJ 48C connectors and can handle up to 16 lines For every four lines you wish to protect you must have one pair of Quad E1 or one pair of mini Quad E1 plug in cards in the AM 3440 The following setup is using Quad E1 card for demonstration If you are using the BNC type Y BOX use BNC cables to connect it to the AM 3440 as shown in Figure 9 1 below For illustration purposes only Port 1 is protected in this sample diagram To protect other ports you must connect them in a similar manner 154 Chapter 9 Appendix C QDS1 1 1 Protection ol oo ol Tx i 9 4 A Tx E B x 4 19 LO A Rx amp Rx B Rx Oj LO Rx 2 Rx_B Rx oJ 1 Tx Line Tx B Tx 1 2 A Tx E Tx B Tx weu o o Allo o ol o o A Rx Line Rx B Rx 2 2 Line Rx B Rx Figure 9 1 Connection for AM3440 and Y BOX with BNC connectors If you are using the RJ48C type Y BOX con
202. ou get access to DSO SNCP Performance Report make sure you have already set up at least one DSO SNCP group with 3E1 plug in cards To set up DSO SNCP protection choose the DSO SNCP setup function on the VT100 menu command path Main Menu S System Setup K DSO SNCP Setup set DSO SNCP to ENABLE and set Action to Create Then press ENTER LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Setup 09 49 51 10 09 2009 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS DS0 SNCP ENABLE Using Map MAP 1 Action Create lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 57 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Select two 3E1 cards for DSO SNCP protection and a particular plug in card as the protected unit and confirm with the setting LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Creation 09 49 12 10 09 2009 Please Input decimal number 1 31 BACKSPACE to edit Protection Group Creation Using map 1 Protected Slot A El Port NON CAS TIS 0 Count 05 Primary Slot 3E1 WWW soon 5 rs ara ets tetas Port P NON CAS Protection Delay 00 Tos 20 Upstream Send AIS On Secondary Slot 2 3E1 ES E Port P NON CAS Protection Delay 00 JS Upstream Send AIS On Switch Mode Non revertible Confirm Yes lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 58 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 7 System Setup Controller Menu gt S System Setup For details see the following sections LOOP AM3440 A
203. p Password TSI Map Setup Select a New TSI Map Copy a TSI Map to Another Clear a TSI Map Command Line nit New Card Clear Empty Slot Link Backup Function QDS1 1 1 Protection DS0 SNCP Setup PDH Ring Protection PDH Ring Diagnostic SNTP Setup TELNET SSH Setup Power Setup VEAZHADWROMDGCHEAMUVUAWH Pp Fe tlt SEES dU Lose se be MS uo SI als dl V VV V V VV V V V V VV VV NNNM lt lt Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command gt gt Press A from the above Controller Setup menu to set up system configuration Then move the cursor at TSI Function option and use TAB or key to set TSI Function as 1 N Multicast Press ESC to return to the Controller Setup menu LOOP AM3440 A System Setup SYSTEM 16 40 56 09 09 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS System Time Date 16 40 57 09 09 2011 Device Name LOOP AM3440 A Network NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer LAN ON 010 003 023 095 255 255 000 000 Ethernet WAN OFF 010 004 001 001 255 255 255 000 HDLC 00000001 Gateway Interface LAN Gateway IPAddr 000 000 000 000 nband Uses Slot D CONSOLE port Baud Rate 9600 Data Length SeBits Stop Bit s LS Bact Parity NONE XON_XOFF gt XOFF TSI map TSI Funcoti n 1 N Multicast Clock Mode t SSM dle Signalling 1010 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 78 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Before setting TSI map
204. p for the plug in cards must be set up first From the main controller menu choose S System Setup to do this Enter the required information where the cursor appears in the left hand side column of the screen In the example below three screens are shown in sequence to display the choices available to the user 6 4 10 1 Map slot D ATM FR to slot B E1 card LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target ATM FR Source Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D Slot D Port I d B ni 17 d 1 d Tue EQ 2 d B 2 18 d 2 d 3 d B 3 19 cg 3 d 4 d B 4 20 d 4 d T S 04 5 a 21 d 5 d Clear No 6 d 22 d 6 d d v vou dd 23d 4 d 8 d 24 d 8 d 9 xd 25 d 95d Source VO 2 26 d LO 3 Slot B 11 d 27 d il 4d Port E 12 d 28 d 12d Te HEN 13 d 29 d l3 d 14 d 30 d 14 d Confirm Yes 15 d 9i ed 15 d 16 d 16 cd lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu 10 El SL PO TS 08 40 09 13 2002 NON CAS PO TS D SL PO TS 7 8 9 20 Za 22 23 24 2 5 26 27 28 29 30 31 l a N a OA A OA then Press D to active gt gt 123 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 4 10 2 Map slot D ATM FR to slot 6 V 35 card LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target ATM FR Source Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS P
205. pe 21 e1 rai 201 RAI 22 e1 ais 202 AIS 23 e1 los 203 LOS 24 e1 lof 204 LOF 25 e1 bpv 205 BPV 26 e1 es 206 ES 27 e1 uas 207 UAS 28 e1 css 208 CSS 2 T1 Card Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type 21 t1 yel 221 YEL 22 t1 ais 222 Als 23 t1 los 223 LOS 24 t1 lof 224 LOF 25 t1 bpv 225 BPV 26 t1 es 226 ES 27 t1 uas 227 UAS 28 t1 css 228 CSS 3 DTE A V 35 X 21 V 36 5RS232 5X50 Card Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type 20 dte unsync 501 UNSYNC 4 8RS232 8X50 Card Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type 20 dte ext clk loss 51 1 EXT CLK LOSS 21 dte rts loss 512 RTS LOSS 22 dte remote alarm 513 REMOTE ALARM 5 DTU 6 10 Card Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type 20 dtu unsync 503 UNSYNC 6 MDSL Card Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type 164 Chapter 10 Appendix D Loop AM 3440 A Alarm Trap Information 7 ATM E1 T1 Card Vendor Spec 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 mdsl master los 361 mdsl slave los 362 mdsl master es 15m 363 mdsl slave es 15m 364 mdsl master ses 15m 365 mdsl slave ses 15m 366 mdsl master es 24h 367 mdsl slave es 24h 368 mdsl master ses 24h 369 mdsl slave ses 24h 370 mdsl mclk loss 37 1 mdsl sealing current 372 Assigned e1 rai 201 t1 yel 221 e1 ais 202 t1 ais 222 e1 los 203 t1 los 223 e1 lof 204 t1 lof 224 e1 bpv 205 t1 bpv 225 e1 es 206 t1 es 226 e1 uas 207 t1 uas 227 e1 css 208 t1 css 228 atm los 261 atm ais 262 atm rdi 263 atm loc 264 fr Ikd 265 8
206. pendant un orage Ne jamais installer la prise t l phonique dans un endroit humide sans prendre la pr caution que cette prise t l phonique soit pr vu pour un environnement humide Ne jamais toucher les fils t l phoniques d nud s sans que la prise t l phonique soit d branch du r seau Prendre toutes les pr cautions d usages pendant l installation ou les modifications de la ligne t l phonique Note AM3440 User s Manual is available in different volumes Main Chassis LOOP AM3440 Wideband Access DCS MUX USER S MANUAL LCD Manual only cover selected plug in module 1DTE Manual 1FOM Manual 1FOMA Manual 3E1 Manual 4E1T1 Manual 4E amp M Manual 4FXSFXO Manual 8bE amp M Manual 8RS232 Manual Conference Manual Co directional G 703 Manual Data Bridge Manual Dry Contact Dry Contact B Manual E1T1 Manual FOM Manual G 703 Co direction Manual G SHDSL Manual Low Speed Optical C37 94 Manual Magneto Manual OCU DP Manual Router Manual Router A Manual Router B Manual Single E1 T1 Manual TDMoE Card Terminal Server Manual 12 24 FXSFXO Manual U interface Manual Discontinued Please refer to the Manual that meet your specific needs TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Product Description ita A a Feed ted br ve Hg eae 1 1 1 Function Description cia RAT O PN PN oddities 1 1 2 Physical Description mad 1 1 3 APC MO LC 2 1 4 Specifications for AMO9440Q coc a A Az 3 2 Installations tote a e o a 15 2
207. pping LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 15 20 40 03 24 2006 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target In Band Source Quad T1 NON CAS Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Slot IB Port 1d 1 124 1 d 3 1 I Iya 3 17 Teos EOL 2d 3 2 118 d 3 18 3d od 1 1949 ub d 4 d 3 4 120d 3 20 T S 4 01 5 d 36 Bo 3215d 3 21 Clear No 6 d 3 6 1 22 d 3 22 d v gt dl qd 2 OT B 2356 3 23 8 d 3 8 124d 3 24 9 d 3 A9 Source 10 d 3 10 Slot t 1 11 d 3 11 Port Pl 12 d 3 12 TS nh 24 123 3013 14 d 3 14 Confirm Yes 15 d 315 16 d 3 16 lt lt Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu then Press D to active gt gt 180 Chapter 12 Appendix F Setting up an AM3440 A PDH Shared Protection Ring T1 8 Ring Enabling From the Master Unit AM 3440 A Controller Setup screen press R to set up PDH Ring Protection LOOP AM3440 A Controller Setup 11 49 25 10 09 2009 gt System gt SNMP Setup Password TSI Map Setup Select a New TSI Map Copy a TSI Map to Another Clear a TSI Map Command Line Init New Card Clear Empty Slot Link Backup Function QDS1 1 1 Protection DSO SNCP Setup PDH Ring Protection PDH Ring Diagnostic gt SNTP Setup TELNET SSH Setup gt Power Setup muzduwogcdnmutmubtuotu ts
208. r Fan tray required Fan tray 12 0 Note CTRL controller N A Not Applicable W Watt and w o without 207 Chapter 14 Appendix G AM3440 A Power Consumption Power limitations determine how many plug in cards of a particular type can be plugged into slots 1 to 12 of a chassis Please refer to the table below Plug in card Capacity for Slots 1 to 12 Plug in card Type Maximum Number of Plug in cards in Slots 1 to 12 12 channel FXS 4 8 channel OCU DP 6 12 channel Magneto 9 8 channel 2W 4W E amp M 11 4 channel G SHDSL 1 pair with line power 2 2 channel G SHDSL 2 pairs with line power 3 24 channel FXS 2 Other plug in cards No limitations Note No such limitations exist for plug in cards plugged into mini slots A to D Condition 1 If total power consumption of device and plug in cards is less than 60 Watts an additional fan try is not required Number of Plug in cards Used Power Consumption Watt 2 controllers 4 8 2 1 channel E1 cards 2 4 4 12 channel FXO cards 4 16 Total 28 Watts Condition 2 If total power consumption of device and plug in cards is more than 60 Watts an additional fan try is required Number of Plug in cards Used Power Consumption Watt 2 controllers 4 8 4 1 channel E1 cards 22 8 2 4 channel E1 cards 3 6 2 Router B cards 6 12 5 4 channel G SHDSL w o line power 5
209. r the Controller Menu press U to choose a slot for Quad E1 port The screen will show as below Then press P to choose mini Quad E1 port press ENTER to get into the port menu SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port Menu 10 28 12 10 27 2004 Version SW S1 CO 10 20 2004 DISPLAY SETUP gt Unit 1 Hour Perf Report L Unit Loopback Setup 2 Unit 24 Hour Perf Report S Unit System Setup A Unit Line Availability K Unit Clear Performance Data Co gt Unit Configuration M Unit Alarm Setup gt Unit Status X gt Unit Clear Alarm Queue amp History H gt Unit Alarm History D Unit Upgrade Firmware Q Unit Alarm Queue LOG MISC U gt Choose Other Slot Y gt Unit Load Default Config P gt Choose Port Z Unit Reset F gt Log Off SETUP MISC Menu gt Log On SETUP MISC Menu Return to Controller Main Menu H O gt gt Please input El Port 1 4 then press ENTER This port menu is for mini Quad E1 Port 2 SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port Menu 10 28 12 10 27 2004 Version SW S1 CO 10 20 2004 DISPLAY SETUP 1 gt Unit 1 Hour Perf Report L Unit Loopback Setup 2 Unit 24 Hour Perf Report S Unit System Setup A Unit Line Availability K Unit Clear Performance Data C Unit Configuration M Unit Alarm Setup lt gt Unit Status X gt Unit Clear Alarm Queue amp History H gt Unit Alarm History D gt Unit Upgrade Firmware
210. re 10 27 49 10 27 2004 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE Please Input nnn nnn nnn nnn BACKSPACE to edit Bank 1 Firmware Ver S1 C0 10 20 2004 Good Bank 2 Firmware Ver S1 B0 10 20 2004 Good Working Firmware Bank 1 TFTP Server IP 000 000 000 000 Firmware File Name lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 6 5 14 Unit Load Default Configuration Press Y to return to default and then confirm it by pressing Y or N SLOT A MQuad El PORT 2 Port Menu 10 28 12 10 27 2004 Version SW S1 CO 10 20 2004 DISPLAY SETUP 1 gt Unit 1 Hour Perf Report L gt Unit Loopback Setup 2 Unit 24 Hour Perf Report S Unit System Setup A Unit Line Availability K Unit Clear Performance Data C gt Unit Configuration M Unit Alarm Setup Unit Status X gt Unit Clear Alarm Queue amp History H Unit Alarm History D Unit Upgrade Firmware Q gt Unit Alarm Queue LOG MISC U gt Choose Other Slot Y gt Unit Load Default Config P gt Choose Port Z Unit Reset F gt Log Off SETUP MISC Menu O gt Log On SETUP MISC Menu E gt Return to Controller Main Menu gt gt Return to default are you sure Y N Note When you load the default configuration the current daughter card map will not be cleared 144 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 5 15 Unit Reset Under Port Menu press Z to reset unit Press Y or N
211. rection T391 T392 N391 N392 N393 1 YES FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 2 YES HDLC 3 YES FR ITU Network 0 9 006 03 04 4 YES HDLC 5 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 6 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 7 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 8 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 9 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 10 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 11 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 1 2 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 13 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 14 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 15 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 16 NO FR ITU Network 0 5 006 03 04 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 2nd screen SLOT D ATM FR El Port Connection Table Setup 10 25 48 09 13 2002 Please Input 1 10 BACKSPACE to edit CH DLCI VPI VCI BR IWK amp Translation DE CLP index 4 04 HDLC 103 00103 0064 MAP 12 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 126 0 0 0 0 0 lt 0 gt Network MAP 127 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 128 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 1 1 16 100 100 64 lt 64 gt Network MAP 2 2 0 101 101 256 0 Network 0 3 3 18 102 102 64 lt 64 gt Network MAP 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 128 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 3rd screen SLOT D ATM FR El Port Connection Tabl
212. rmal state the user has three options to choose from The detailed description for each option is listed below AUTO The alarm relay will return to normal state once the problem of all detected alarm is solved To check the alarm status see the Q Alarm Queue Summary screen The alarm status clear indicates the problem of the alarm s is solved PERIOD The user has to set up a time limit first and the default setting is 2 seconds That means the alarm relay will return to normal condition after 2 seconds the alarm is detected MANUAL When alarms are detected and reported to CTRL card the user has to cut off all the alarms manually by pressing the ACO button on the controller s front panel or by activating A Alarm Cut off from the main menu Then the alarm relay will return to the normal state DISABLE The alarm relay will remain disabled when alarms occur LOOP AM3440 A System Alarm Setup 18 18 54 09 30 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Alarm Action ALARM ENABLE RELAY PERIOD PERIOD s 2 Alarm Type ALARM CUT OFF MAJOR SLOT INACTIVE MAJOR SLOT START UP MAJOR CLOCK LOSS MAJOR LIN SWITCH MAJOR MAP SWITCH MAJOR POWER ALARM MAJOR TYPE MISMATCH MAJOR DUAL CPU ALARM MAJOR MANAGEMENT ALM MAJOR lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 83 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 9 Firmware Transfer IMPORTANT Start from V
213. rol for Disable major minor critical a slot startup plug in plug in card b primary startup first startup CPU card c redundant insert redundant CPU inserted d redundant to primary redundant CPU become to primary if primary CPU loss Clock Loss alarm control for clock loss line clock or external clock Disable major minor critical Link Switch alarm control for link switch in e1 t1 protection Disable major minor critical mechanism Map Switch alarm control for map switch timing switch Disable major minor critical mechanism Power Alarm alarm control for Disable major minor critical a power fail power plug in card failed b fan fail fan failed c power consumption power over load Type Mismatch alarm control for Disable major minor critical a plug in card type mismatch if plug in plug in card different with previous record b link change if link ID different with previous record Note disable no alarm issue major issue major alarm and enable major relay if enabled minor issue minor alarm and enable miner relay if enabled critical issue critical alarm and enable major relay if enabled 35 Chapter 3 Operation Table 3 4 DTE PORT Alarm Type Table Alarm Type Alarm Description Threshold V 35 slot m DTEZn UNSYNC RTS Loss V 35 interface no slot number m port number n n 1 6 Table 3 5 Alarm Type Numbers
214. rtible Data Voice Data Confirm Yes lt lt ESC key ignore and return ENTER key accept change gt gt 186 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup If you create another DSO SNCP circuit on timeslot 10 and press Yes to confirm the screen will show as below LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Creation 14 38 39 10 15 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Protection Group Creation Using map 1 Total DSO SNCP 2 Protected Slot C E1 RE EEE sales PR ARS PRA E ENE SD 1 Port NON CAS Ti Si 0L Count 01 Primary Slots Y 3E1 RR AA Mi Port P1 NON CAS Protection Delay 00 TS uso Upstream Send AIS On Secondary Slot 8 3E1 S 2123 ds SiiLhes di 6 4 33 Port P1 NON CAS Protection Delay 00 U S LO Upstream Send AIS On Switch Mode Non revertible Data Voice Data Confirm Yes lt lt ESC key ignore and return ENTER key accept change gt gt 187 Chapter 13 3E1 DSO SNCP Setup When the protected interface is a voice card Below is a sample screen of DSO SNCP setup with a protected voice interface FXS card A DSO SNCP circuit is created on timeslot 1 Note that for voice interface the timeslot number starts from timeslot 01 not timeslot 00 LOOP AM3440 A DSO SNCP Creation 10 36 02 11 26 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Protection Group Creation Using map 1 Total DSO SNCP 1 Protected Slot 9 FXS BSc ss Port P1 ToS 20T Count 01 Primary Slot 7 3E1
215. ry M Alarm Setup G gt Upgrade Firmware LOG MISC F Log Off O gt Log On B gt DTE board Return to Default U gt Choose Other Slot Z gt Unit Reset P gt Choose DTE Port E Return to Main Menu gt gt SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command gt 6 3 4 DTE Configuration By pressing C the unit setup menu is displayed as follows For V 35 DTE Interface SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 Unit Configuration 18 35 23 03 01 2001 LOCAL Channel E Rate 64KBps Clock Normal Data Normal RTS Active TTM So Off V 54 Off INTERFACE V 35 lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 103 For V 36 DTE Interface Chapter 6 Terminal Operation Channel Rate Clock Data RTS TTM V 54 INTERFACE SLOT 5 DTE PORT 1 64KBps Normal Normal Active Off Off V 36 lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu Unit Configuration 15 39 39 04 29 2004 SPACE bar to refresh gt gt For ElA530 RS449 DTE Interface Channel Rate Clock Data RTS TTM V 54 INTERFACE SLOT 11 DTE PORT 1 64KBps Normal Normal Active Off Off EIA530 RS449 lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu Unit Configuration 15 41 54 04 29 2004 SPACE bar to refresh gt gt For X 21 V 11 DTE Interface Channel Rate Clock Data RTS TTM V 54 INTERFACE SLOT 7 DTE PORT 1 64KBp
216. s If yes use the LED indications to guide the user to test other parts of the network such as the E1 line or interface plug in Especially during initial installation excessive errors may be due to a incorrect configuration of either Loop AM or of the equipment at the other end of the line or b due to faulty line installation which results in excessive noise cross talk or impedance mismatch Especially in electrically noisy environments such as central offices use of shielded cables is mandatory 4 6 2 Substitution If a spare AM3440 plug in is available then replace the working one with the spare The user must carefully configure the spare exactly as the working one If the substitution clears the problem then the original working one is suspect Note that this is not definitive as other reasons may cause the same symptom A good practice is to reconfigure the original one and swap once more If both units behave the same then the problem is probably elsewhere 4 6 3 Using Loopback Plugs Without a spare loopback plugs are handy for diagnosis Note that internal loopback facilities of the AM3440 do not include the interface circuitry Thus a set of plugs one for each of the interfaces line and DTE are needed for complete tests These plugs are wired such that signals from the Loop AM are loopback by hard wire back to the receive pin of the same plug Replace the line connector with a loopback plug Observe if the line is in sy
217. s Loop Telecom s enterprise MIB Network manager can use any SNMP compatible network management system such as Hewlett Packard s HP Open View to monitor and control AM3440 Please refer to each respective SNMP manager operation instruction to incorporate the AM3440 enterprise MIB to the system 40 Chapter 3 Operation Telnet Station AM3440 Ethernet El Figure 3 1 HDLC using E1 router 3 7 In Band Management Setup In addition to the console port and the Ethernet port AM3440 can also allow remote management through a 64 Kbps time slot from the network line To achieve remote management using this in band technique two steps are necessary First the Ethernet connection of the remote management terminal must be inserted to a designated time slot in the network This time slot can be a DSO channel in a E1 or T1 line or a DSO channel in any of the broadband facilities such as E3 DS3 STM1 or OC3 This can be achieved though a router CSU DSU mux series of equipment or in one step through a router interface on a AM3440 LAN AM3440 i 64 Kbps Router E1 TI In Band Insertion Em Management Terminal E1 T1 ey E1 T1 AM3440 Router AM3440 E1 T1 In Band Extraction Next the equipment to be management namely this AM3440 must extract this 64 Kbps time slot to the management port Th
218. s Normal Normal Active Off Off X 241 lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu Unit Configuration 15 40 36 04 29 2004 SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 104 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 3 2 DTE Status To enter the DTE status menu press The following screen appears Unit Status SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 LOCAL DTE M1 existed YES RTS LOSS YES EXT CLK LOSS NO DSR YES CTS NO DCD YES DTR NO RTS NO Loopback Status DTE Loopback OFF BERT OFF 18 35 27 03 01 2001 lt lt ESC key to return to previous menu SPACE bar to refresh gt gt 6 3 3 Alarm History Press H to view the alarm history SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 11 19 07 03 02 2001 Port i State Count Alarm 0 DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE Ou B WN 000000 ooooo lt lt ESC to return to previous menu SPACE to refresh U key to change unit gt gt 105 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 3 4 System Setup Press S to setup the system SLOT 9 DTE PORT 1 Setup Configuration ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS ness LOCA ee gt Channel 0 Rate 64KBps Clock Normal Data Normal RTS Active TTM Off V 54 Off INTERFACE V 35 lt lt ESC key to previous menu 18 35 35 03 01 2001 SPACE bar to another page gt gt 6 3 5 Loopback Test To enter the Loopback and Test screen press L The
219. stamp Alarm queue support controller switched AM3440 also has alarm history and alarm status registers which is used to track the alarm count Each alarm can be individually enabled or disabled When disabled no action is taken When enabled alarm counter increments on the occurrence of the specific type of alarm When alarm occurs or the counter threshold exceeds alarm is triggered When alarm is triggered a relay is activated if itis enabled Otherwise no action is taken and only the specific alarm count is incremented When threshold level is implemented it is based on the 15 minutes alarm count register All alarms are disabled by default The relay is also disabled by default Table 3 2 Alarm Action Table Alarm Action Alarm Severity enable or disable all alarm event include plug in card Disable Enable alarm enable or disable relay while alarm occurs Disable Manual Auto Alarm Cut Off issue alarm to Management if alarm cut off key Disable Enable pressed 34 Chapter 3 Operation Table 3 3 System Alarm Type Table Alarm Type Alarm Description Alarm Severity Port Inactive alarm control for Disable major minor critical a slot inactive pull out plug in card or plug in card failed b redundant loss redundant CPU pull out or failed c redundant checksum error checksum error while transmit data from primary to redundant d redundant unsync redundant SW is not same with primary CPU Port Start up alarm cont
220. t z zen m dle p edpis ve va zemi Po skon en jeho ivotnosti odovzdajte pros m zariadenie na pr slu nom zbernom mieste pod a platn ch miestnych predpisov a noriem Ko se izdelku izte e ivljenska doba ga odnesite na ustrezno zbirno mesto oziroma ga odvrzite v skladu z veljavnimi predpisi To T OS TNG EITOUPYIK S Zug TOU rrpol vrog TrapakaAWw MeT Te TO ora ELDIK Onpe a rrou Map xovtal OTN xwpa gas HL ar EE EE Ao JEJ MAR ERY En SITE HO e cae vii Chapter 1 Product Description 1 Product Description 1 1 Function Description For AM3440 Access DCS MUX The Loop AM3440 A is the Access DCS MUX that combines various digital access interfaces into E1 or T1 lines for convenient transport and switching The Loop AM3440 Access DCS MUX provides access for a variety of TDM IP and voice interfaces detailed on next page These interfaces are compatible with other Loop products Using these products a DTE interface can be extended over copper wire pairs or any E1 T1 transport facility For each Quad E1 T1 plug in card each card can have as many as DSO 124 96 time slots from G SHDSL RS232 X 21 V 35 V 36 and EIA530 RS449 interfaces which can be multiplexed to fill 4 E1 T1 lines AM3440 also supports fiber optical plug in card which can be used to aggregate up to 4 E1 channels onto a single fiber optical interface
221. t NONE XON XOFF 3 2 4 Menu Lock The terminal is used to read alarms system configurations and system status It also can be used to change system configurations and clear the alarm queue etc By enabling the menu lock only read operations are allowed Modifications to the current status are not allowed Users may not change system configurations or clear performance data Password and menu clock options are disabled by default The default password is LOOP 33 Chapter 3 Operation 3 2 5 Logon Logoff and Password Logoff prevents system configuration changes at the terminal while logon allows system configuration changes The password feature is used to augment lock control against unauthorized terminal users from changing system parameters from the terminal With password enabled logon requires entering the correct password If password is disabled no password is required to logon The default option of the password is disabled The default password is LOOP If password is enabled users must enter the password when logging in to gain the privilege to change system configurations by the terminal To change the password for the first time enter the default password when prompted for the old password 3 3 Alarms and Reports 3 3 1 Alarms AM3440 has many types of alarm This includes system to control all of alarm as listed in Tables below Also AM3440 has alarm queue which record the latest 300 alarms with time
222. terface SLOT D ATM FR El Port Loopback Test 15 44 49 07 24 2002 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE ENTER KEY ITEM SELECT NEAR END LOOPBACK n ROEE LOCAL PLB LLB SEND LOOPBACK ACTIVATE CODE TO FAR END PAYLOAD LINE SEND LOOPBACK DEACTIVATE CODE TO FAR END PAYLOAD LINE SEND TEST PATTERN OFF PRBS FULL STATUS lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 6 4 9 Alarm Setup Under the port menu press M to setup alarm 6 4 9 1 Alarm Setup FR to ATM SLOT D ATM FR El Port Alarm Setup 17 45 51 03 23 2002 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS TYPE THRESHOLD ALARM YEL ENABLE AIS ENABLE LOS ENABLE LOF ENABLE BPV 10E 5 ENABLE ES 001 ENABLE UAS 001 ENABLE css 001 ENABLE ATM LOS ENABLE ATM AIS ENABLE ATM RDI ENABLE ATM LOC ENABLE FR LKD ENABLE lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 122 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 4 9 2 Alarm Setup FR to FR SLOT D ATM FR El Port Alarm Setup ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS TYPE THRESHOLD ALARM YEL ENABLE AIS ENABLE LOS ENABLE LOF ENABLE BPV 10E 5 ENABLE ES 001 ENABLE UAS 001 ENABLE CSS 001 ENABLE FR LKD ENABLE lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 6 4 10 AM 3440 TSI MAP Setup 17 25 38 07 21 2002 Before the ATM FR card can be set up the TSI ma
223. to connect with other AM3440 or O9310 E1 AM3440 A has capacity for 12 single slots and 4 mini plug in slots This unit is a full cross connect and can act as a mini DACS This means that one or more of the WAN ports can be used as a Drop amp Insert function with fractional E1 T1 lines which can be muxed into a full E1 T1 line Redundancy is available in dual CPU controller and power supply options making it an excellent fit for critical applications Although the chassis does not contain and has no need for fan cooling an external fan tray is available The Loop AM3440 supports local control and diagnostics by using an external 2 line by 40 character LCD display and keypads or by using a VT 100 terminal connected to the console port The Loop AM3440 also supports Ethernet Telnet and SNMP so that it can be controlled and diagnosed from remote locations as well An in band management channel with GUI is available In addition to the LCD display there is LED indication for all plug in cards Finally the Loop AM3440 consists of a rugged reinforced aluminum chassis giving this equipment a more durable structure and a longer physical life For Loop VV Y BOX Loop VV Y BOX is designed to provide 1 for 1 protection function for Quad E1 interfaces of AM3440 shelf Two kinds of connector type are available for Y BOX BNC connector and RJ48C connectors Each Y BOX with BNC connectors support 1 for 1 protection function for 2 Quad E1 interfaces o
224. troller Return to Default Z gt Controller Reset gt gt SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command gt If the password option is turned on a prompt asking for password is shown gt gt Enter password XXXX With the password option is turned on only after a valid password is entered the full menu is shown otherwise user is asked to enter the correct password again gt gt Invalid input of password Try again Y N If password is correctly entered or if the password option is OFF the full controller main menu is shown Otherwise only display menu items will be shown which are in the lower left half of the screen 6 1 Menu Tree S gt System Setup Chapter 6 Terminal Operation A gt System S gt SNMP Setup B gt Password C gt TSI Map Setup D Select a New TSI Map E gt Copy a TSI Map to Another A gt SNMP System Setup B gt V1 Trap Setup C gt V3 User Based Security Model Setup D gt V3 View Based Access Control Model Setup 1 E gt V3 View Based Access Control Model Setup 2 F gt V3 Target amp Notify Setup F gt Clear a TSI Map m L gt Command Line I gt Init New Card t J gt Clear Empty Slot F G gt Link Backup Function H Q QDS1 1 1 Protection I K gt DSO SNCP Setup R gt PDH Ring Protection H T gt PDH Ring Diagnostic N gt SNTP Setup I H TELNET SSH Setup P gt Power Setup Setup
225. tup The user must select SNMP model for V1 only V3 only or V1 V3 from the screen The user can reset the device name system location and system contact info LOOP AM3440 A System Setup SNMP 18 29 51 08 03 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE BACKSPACE to edit ESC to abort Device Name LOOP AM3440 A System Location 8F No 8 HSIN ANN ROAD SCIENCE BASED INDUSTRIAL PARK HSINCHU 30078 TAIWAN System Contact Name FAE Tel 886 3 5787696 Fax 886 3 5787695 E mail FAEGloop com tw SNMP Model gt Vd only lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 62 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation V1 Trap Setup Press B from the main menu to set up Trap and Community The user can set a maximum of five trap IP for SNMPv1 The trap IP is the server s IP for NMS management Once an alarm occurs in the AM3440 controller the alarm will be sent to the target trap IP address trough LAN or WAN depending on the trap system IP you choose To set up the Trap IP follow the procedures below LOOP AM3440 A Trap and Community 09 51 07 15 2010 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS Set Community Get Community public public Community z 000 000 000 000 Community Name public 000 000 000 000 Community Name public 000 000 000 000 Community Name public Community Trap IP Trap IP Trap IP 1 Os WIN HH Trap system IP 2
226. uad E1 Pin Definition oooonnnncnn nniccnnnacccccnanonnnc nano nennen 28 Table 2 14 Default Software Configuration rare nn nr nano mnes 28 Table 3 1Gonsole Port Settirig iter roti rei A 33 Table 3 2 Alarm Action Table recited in Al tada ncn 34 Table 3 3 System Alarm Type Table mne en nara emen ene SRi Erai nnns 35 Table 3 4 DTE PORT Alarm Type Table reiterar cnn nneen en rra 36 Table s o Alarm Type Numbers norras reaa aaa RENEA ARREA AAA eue PERLE e EN SERES RN RR RR e Y XXE dama E R ESES 36 Table 3 6 Performance Parameter List ssssssssssessseeeeeneenenen nnne enne nennen enne nnns 37 Table 3 7 Performance Report Options ssssssssssssssssssseeseeeeneemen ennt nennen rennen nn nene Emnene ens 38 Table 3 8 Front Panel LED Table DS1 DTE ATM FR nano nonno nc nn naar eene 39 Table 3 9 Eror Message Table iia 42 Table 6 1 Power consumption oooooococococccnncnccnnnnononccnnnnncnnnn nen RRE R RR RR RR RR nnn sn nene n nsn nnn nenne nr nnne 53 Table 14 1 Power Consumption of AM3440 A Plug in cards for 48 Vdc 100W sse 205 Table 14 2 Power Consumption of AM3440 A Plug in cards for 125 Vdc 100W Power Module 207 vi GB ES NL DK FIN PL CZ SK SLO GR PRC Bitte f hren Sie das Gerat am Ende seinerLewbensdauer den zue Verf gung stehended R ckgabeund Sammelsystemen zu At the end of the product s
227. umber Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Port 7 Port 8 Port 9 Port 10 Port 11 Port 12 Kd5 o0 4oo01A amp cocnNN O Ao 10 5 ccAlarmType 20 Controller alarm Number Alarm type 0 alarm cut off 1 slot no work 2 slot start 3 slot clock loss 4 primary start 5 redundant loss 6 backup switch 7 power fail 8 redundant chksum error 9 fan fail 10 map switch 11 link protection 12 redundant insert 13 redundant unsync 14 redundant to primary 15 plug in card type mismatch 16 link id mismatch 17 power consumption alarm 163 Chapter 10 Appendix D Loop AM 3440 A Alarm Trap Information Number Alarm type 18 ssm clock switch 19 management alarm 103 master clock loss 104 second clock loss 105 redundant ext clock loss 106 qe1t1 1for1 switch 111 ds0 sncp switch 121 sntp alarm 10 6 ccAlarmType Unit alarm ccAlarmType for unit alarm has two formats Vendor Spec and Assigned Vendor Spec is the original format that displays only the alarm number Assigned is the new format that displays the alarm type description Select the format in V1 Trap Setup Command Path Main Menu S System Setup gt S SNMP Setup gt B V1 Trap Setup The alarm type on the SNMP screen will show in the format that you choose Note E amp M FXO FXS and TS card do not have alarms so there is no alarm type to these cards For RS232 and ElA530 please refer to DTE A alarm type table 1 E1 Card Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm ty
228. us NORMAL Internal Clock SSM Message External Clock SSM Message External Clock Type lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Field Setting Options First Clock Source NONE INTERNAL EXTERNAL Line Interface Second Clock Source NONE INTERNAL EXTERNAL Line Interface Third Clock Source NONE INTERNAL EXTERNAL Line Interface Internal Clock SSM Message Input 0 9 A F SSM code please refer to SSM code for E1 Operation table below External Clock SSM Message SSM code please refer to SSM code for E1 Operation table below External Clock Type E1 75ohm E1 1200hm T1 2048KHz 75ohm 2048KHz 1200hm Note Line Interface includes Quad E1 T1 mini Quad E1 FOM and 1FOMA card 98 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation AM3440 Unit 2 AM3440 Unit 1 Unit 1 clock source setting First Clock Source slot1 port3 Second Clock Source slot1 port 1 Third Clock Source internal El Network Unit 2 clock source setting First Clock Source slot1 port1 Second Clock Source Internal Third Clock Source None The Unit 1 setting screen shown below SLOT 1 P3 is the current clock and top priority for the quality level of its receive Sabit is 4 So the quality level of its transmit Sabit must be F LOOP AM3440 A First Clock Source SLOT 1 P3 Second Clock Source SLOT 1 P1 Third Clock Source INTERNAL Current Clock FIRST CLK Clock Status NORMAL nternal
229. work Time Protocol NTP used to synchronize computer clocks in the Internet LOOP AM3440 A SNTP setup 09 17 12 02 20 2008 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL UP DOWN OPTIONS SNTP ON OFF OFF SNTP server 1 000 000 000 000 SNTP server 2 000 000 000 000 SNTP timezone 0 lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt 75 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 7 17 TELNET SSH Setup Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt H TELNET SSH Setup SSH Secure Shell is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged over a secure channel between two computers Encryption provides confidentiality and integrity of data SSH uses public key cryptography to authenticate the remote computer and allow the remote computer to authenticate the user if necessary TELNET TELecommunication NETwork is a network protocol used on the Internet or local area network LAN connections LOOP AM3440 A TELNET SSH Setup 11 42 03 03 07 2008 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE ENTER KEY ITEM SELECT SSH Server OFF TELNET Server OFF lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Note Configuration Option Default SSH Server ON OFF TELNET Server ON OFF OFF 76 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation 6 2 7 18 Power Setup Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt P Power Setup The default value is 48 V DC Of the three kinds of power type 48V DC 125 V DC and
230. working FRF 5 Service inter working FRF 8 Map FECN field in Frame Relay to ATM EFCI field Service inter working FRF 8 ATM EFCI is always set to congestion net experienced Translation column appears in table see Translation below Translation column appears in table see Translation below SVC YES SVC NO Do translation between Frame Relay FRF 3 and ATM RFC1483 Forward encapsulations unaltered MAP Maps content of DE discard eligibility in Frame Relay or CLP cell loss probability in ATM to CLP in ATM DE in Frame Relay Regardless of contend of DE and CLP set outgoing DE and CLP to constant 0 Regardless of contend of DE and CLP set outgoing DE and CLP to constant 1 129 Chapter 6 Terminal Operation SLOT D ATM FR El Port Connection Table Setup 10 25 48 09 13 2002 Please Input 1 10 BACKSPACE to edit CH DLCI VPI VCI BR IWK amp Translation DE CLP index 4 04 HDLC 103 00103 0064 MAP 12 5 0 0 0 0 0 lt 0 gt Network MAP 126 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 127 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 128 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 1 1 16 100 100 64 lt 64 gt Network MAP 2 2 0 101 101 256 lt 0 gt Network 0 3 3 18 102 102 64 lt 64 gt Network MAP 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network MAP lt lt Press ESC k
231. ximum of 31 timeslots can be set Configure Trap IP address and its community Controller Menu gt S System Setup gt S SNMP Setup gt B V1 Trap Setup LOOP AM3440 A Trap and Community 11 39 15 08 02 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE BACKSPACE to edit ESC to abort Get Community public Set Community public Trap IP 1 192 168 001 254 Community Name public Trap IP 2 000 000 000 000 Community Name public Trap IP 3 000 000 000 000 Community Name public Trap IP 4 000 000 000 000 Community Name public Trap IP 5 000 000 000 000 Community Name public Trap system IP WAN Alarm Trap Type Vendor Spec lt lt Press ESC key to return to previous menu gt gt Configure TSI Map Controller Menu S System Setup C TSI Map Setup Use arrow keys and the TAB key to set up the HDLC TSI map You must select a time slot to use for inband management In the example below we decided to map Time Slot 1 of Port A to Time Slot 1 of the IB In band Port for this purpose When you have completed your TSI map press ESC to return to the Controller Setup menu Then press D from that menu to activate the new map LOOP AM3440 A System Setup MAP 16 47 28 08 02 2011 ARROW KEYS CURSOR MOVE TAB ROLL OPTIONS MAP NO MAP 1 Target El NON CAS Source In Band Target PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS PO TS D SL PO TS Slot w A B2S558 AH ss Hs 22 25 scccc5Ll ss 2c 22 2
232. y applies to Quad E1 T1 Mini Quad E1 and TDMoE Quad E1 T1 cards Apply to QDS1 1 1 protection function two plug in cards must be inserted next to each other as a pair so that one plug in card can be used to protect the other A pair of Quad E1 T1 Mini Quad E1 and TDMoE Quad E1 T1 cards should be installed in one of the following slot groupings 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 5 amp 6 7 amp 8 9810 or 11 amp 12 The pair of cards should not be installed in the following groupings 2 amp 3 4 amp 5 6 amp 7 B amp 9 or 10811 Before removing any card from AM3440 shelf please make sure its connecting cables are removed from Quad E1 plug in card first This chapter introduces only 1 1 protection function for a pair of Quad E1 T1 For 1 1 protection function of TEMoE and Quad E1 T1 please refer to the Appendix B of the TDMoE card User s Manual There are two types of protection available for the Quad E1 card They are Circuit Protection and Line Protection Circuit Protection requires the use of a Loop VV Y BOX This Y Box is specifically designed to provide a 1 1 circuit protection function for the Quad E1 card of the Loop AM 3440 shelf Line Protection does not require the use of a Y Box Each Quad E1 card has four ports The ports of one card protect the corresponding ports of the other card For example Port 1 of the protection card protects Port 1 of the other card Similarly Port 2 of the protection card protects Port 2 of the

LOOP-AM MODEL 3440 Wideband Access DCS-MUX

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents